EXHIBIT 1
1M23N27902

14 CHANNEL COMPUTER SYSTEM

TM

TM
14 CHANNEL COMPUTER SYSTEM

TM

TM

Technical updates and additional programming examples available at: http://www.futaba-rc.com/faq

Entire Contents © 2012
2 <Table of Contents>

INTRODUCTION............................................... 4

	
	

 ......................................... 4


		
	
 ........... 5


		 ...................................... 6



	

			


	!"	



#$ ............................................................. 6

%&'(	) ................................................... 10

&


		*+,	 ............................................ 10

2
	
	
"
	

 ........... 11



 ....................................................... 12

7

	 ....................................... 13

2
		"
#	


 ...................... 14

9	 ................................................... 14

!"	;=$ ............................................... 15

#
		7*;7+$ ....................................... 15

?
	9	($ ............................................ 15


	9

	9	($ ....................................... 15

='@AB7	)EF)@'FE	% ........ 15

Touch sensor ................................................... 16

G	
H
 ............................................. 17

	
 ............................................................ 19

2
@# ............................................... 21

B

	
	

		"
	

 ........ 22

(


	


 ................................... 24

(


L	


	

 ...................... 26



	

	!"
	
#		
 ... 27

E%)@E%)M	B

 ............................ 28

E%)	Q#	


 ................................... 29

E%)M	
 ................................................ 30

E%)@E%)M	


# ......................... 31

7


	
 ............................................ 32

%B2	'(7B'F ....................................... 33

%

	2"
## ............................................ 33

=!		"
#
	"
	F=	%

 ................. 33

=!			'F@'&&	"
	

 .......... 34

Q"
	#	 ............................................ 34

Q"
	#	 ............................................ 34

9!	

	

	
	
	";! ...... 34

Q
#	
	
	!
	 ........................ 34

(
#
		"
	
L	

 ..................... 34

=
	

 .................................................... 35

)
	
 ....................................................... 36

9G	

	7*+,@(SVVW%$ ............... 37

(
#
	
#		(@2	
...................... 39

(2B?(	F	(?'	BF7997B'F . 40

(


	
	
	
 ..................... 40


	
		
	
 .................... 41

'9	%B2	77BF,	('2)( ... 44



@#
	
	
#	

 ........ 44

=

	
	
#	

 ................ 46

&)F27B'F	'&	X7	F) ................ 50

7

 ............................................................. 51


 ............................................................. 54

User Name ....................................................... 55

 ............................................................... 56

=@Q	
# ..................................................... 57


	9E ....................................................... 59

	9G	 ....................................................... 62

B
	 .................................................... 63

%)	
	 .................................................... 64

&)F27B'F	'&	9BFY,	F) ............. 67

2	&$

9G
#
	
		

 ...................... 67


	 ................................................. 68


	

 .................................................... 69


	7
...................................................... 71

7%9	'&	2'F7F7
<Table of Contents> 3


 ............................................................. 73

& .......................................................... 76

;7 ......................................................... 78


	(


 ................................................. 79

&
	

 ........................................................... 80

	 ........................................................ 81


	

	 .................................................... 82

7"
	2	@=
	$ .......................... 83

B
	!		$ ...................................... 84

!
"	(#	=
	$ .................................. 85

!
"	=
		

	=;*$ ........................ 86

7*;7+	
# .................................................. 89

Q
# ........................................................... 90

7


......................................................... 91

7


Z(;
 .......................................... 92

7


Z; ......................................... 93

7


Z
............................................... 94

7


Z ................................................ 95

7


Z

 .......................................... 96

7


Z
 .............................................. 97

7


Z

 ........................................... 98

7


Z

 ......................................... 99

7


Z

 ............................................ 101


 ............................................................ 102


Z

 ................................................ 103


Z
#
 .............................................. 103


Z


 ............................................. 104


Z
	 ............................................... 104

Data Reset ..................................................... 105

&)F27B'F	'&	'9	F) ............... 106

2	& ...................................... 106


		9G
#
	
$

2	

	,@=
	$ ................ 107

Dual Rate ...................................................... 109

#
	 ..................................................111

&
		@=
	$ .............................. 113



@,
	& ........................... 115


	
		 ........................... 115

"	2
	@,$ ................................. 117

7=(	2
		$ .................................. 118

7=(	

		$ ................................... 119

B9	


	
	*;B9$ ................. 120

&
	
#	M;&9	
	$ ........................ 121

B9		2

	&9	M;B9[M;&9	
	$*MM

B9		%
G
	&9	,		+;&9$ ........ 123

B9		() ................................................... 124

()		B9 ................................................... 125

2

		
	*;B9$ ....................... 127

9		2

	
	*;B9$ .................. 129

2

	&9		9	M;B9[*;&9	
	$ 130

%
\	,		
	!#	M;B9	
	

	\#	!#	M;B9[*&9	
	$ ...... 131

7		,		M;B9	
	$ ........... 133


G
			M;B9	
	$ ............. 135

,				,X	
	#$ ............ 137

?;
 .............................................................. 139



 ........................................................ 140

Q#
	&#	!#	$ .......................... 141

 ............................................................. 142

()		9		$ ................................ 144


	(		$ ..................................... 145

=

	& .................................... 147


	
		 ........................... 147

B7	2
@	 ....................................... 148

7=(	2
@7"
	"
	@7"
	


 ......................................................... 151

7=(	= ...................................................... 154

!
"	 ..................................................... 155

7=(	 ....................................................... 156

B7		()	(
	$ ..................... 157

,		,X	
	#$ .............................. 158

,
 ....................................................... 161

FBA ...................................................... 164

7
	7*@7M ............................................. 164

!"	
#	
" ................................. 166
4 <Introduction>

INTRODUCTION

Thank you for purchasing a Futaba®

 FASSTest-2.4GHz* 14SG series digital proportional R/C system. This 

system is extremely versatile and may be used by beginners and pros alike. In order for you to make the 

	




	





	
	



	







!"#


	$



%&

*FASSTest: Futaba Advanced Spread Spectrum Technology extend system telemetry

'	
	



(

change without notice.

%
%)
 








hobby’s “off season” to ensure safe operation.

IN NORTH AMERICA 

+
		


%&	






+


,0%3
! "   
 	

56

	
67
 8


	
	
,0%3


system and is updated regularly. Any technical updates and US manual corrections will be available on this 


	



	"

	

information on contacting us via email for the most rapid and convenient response. 

'9

;










<
	
		







			





	

!



	

		
9
=


are available Monday through Friday 8-5 Central time to assist you. 

FOR SERVICE ONLY: 

Futaba Service Center 

@BBDE'%,

&

JK,LDD

Phone: 217-398-0007 

www.futaba-rc.com/service.html

Email: service@futaba-rc.com

FOR SUPPORT : 

(PROGRAMMING AND USER QUESTIONS) 

+

	
)

	

56	
6

Fax: 217-398-7721 

Phone: 217-398-8970 option 2

OUTSIDE NORTH AMERICA 

+





	





or service needs. 

+
Y

	












sold in North America only. Products purchased elsewhere may vary. Always contact your region’s support 

center for assistance. 
<Introduction> 5


		
	
	

,7

	

	
#

$	

in any application other than the control of models for hobby and recreational purposes. The product is 

(
	[
	\
67

]




such purposes. 

2. Exportation precautions: 

#
$<8	
	
	





	


		

58

(8+

	






	


	
8





Y







immediately to determine if such export regulations have been met. 

#$^	


_8
7
&\






	8

7Y






@ [	
 
( 
 
 	 
) 

    	 
Y

	
 
( 
 
 	 
   
  
 

  

warranty. 

Compliance Information Statement (for U.S.A.)

7



&
	
\`BBL%j
,q	

&&\=
(	)

#,$7



		


#D$7
 

		





operation.

The responsible party of this device compliance is:

Futaba Service Center

@BBDE'%,&

JK,LDD^%

7_J#D,`$@{L5L{`B_5
)|	

5#%$

7_J#D,`$@{L5BBB`_5
)|	

5#%$

7\j\&%_J!5









Futaba Corporation of America is voluntarily participating in an industry-wide program to collect 





		
!	

^%
7\j\&




!5










. 

#	^%$

You may contact your local recycling center for information on where to return the spent battery. Please 


 ,5LBB5Lj77_\~ 	 	
  E& 

 
  
 

 

 &
 	

America's involvement in this program is part of its commitment to protecting our environment and 

conserving natural resources. 

\j\&


!	\

j

\
&

6 <Introduction>

Federal Communications Commission Interference Statement (for U.S.A.)

7

	
	
&
j



to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful 

interference in a residential installation.

7





	


	









		



  

 
 	     
 

 

 	    



		

		




			
)

--Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. 

55





--Consult the dealer or your Futaba Serivce center for help. 

CAUTION:

To assure continued FCC compliance: 




8


	






Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation

7
&&\8




	

DB

maintained between the antenna of this device and all persons. 

75

(






Meaning of Special Markings 

Pay special attention to safety where indicated by the following marks: 

DANGER5+






6(
	

carried out properly. 

WARNING5+






(


	



	
(


physical damage is high. 

CAUTION5+
	(





	(




	



= Prohibited = Mandatory 

Warning: Always keep electrical components away from small children. 

FLYING SAFETY 

WARNING

7
	
	
	

	
)

Have regular maintenance performed. Although your 14SG protects the model memories with 

5
__+\=[
#
$





transmitter still should have regular checkups for wear and tear. We recommend sending your system 



%&



5
5
	 
  ! 


service. 
<Introduction> 7

NiMH/NiCd Battery 

Charge the batteries!#%&
E&
	
$







	








	


<



7,0%395


during the session pay attention to the duration of usage. 

	\#	#	

		


	

	!		"
#
E			
			
	!	



	!
#	
	

		
	
	

		
		!"
		
"
#
E	!
	

"
G		

	
	


	


			

"	\#"E

Where to Fly 

We recommend that you fly at a recognized model airplane flying field. You can find model clubs 


 	  
! 
 
  
    ^%  
 

 	 [

Aeronautics. 

~






	[
#[$

DqBB




7

	




newcomer training are available. Contact the AMA at the address or toll-free phone number below. 

Academy of Model Aeronautics 

q,K,_
[
'

[E0`@BD

7#LBB$0@q5{DKD


8#`Kq$DL{50D0L

or via the Internet at http:\\www.modelaircraft.org

!
	
	

	

		"
	\#	
	
 as well as the presence and location 

	




j

	







	




	

vicinity. 
8 <Introduction>

NiMH/NiCd Battery Safety and Handling instructions

IMPORTANT!

Use only the Futaba special charger included with this set or other chargers approved by Futaba to 

charge the NiMH batteries in the T14SG transmitter included with this set.

It is important to understand the operating characteristics of NiMH/NiCd batteries.Always read the 



	
E[6E&




	

  
 
 !
    
 

   
 
 

surroundings and possibly result in a FIRE!

IMPORTANT PRECAUTIONS

Do not attempt to disassemble NiMH/NiCd packs or cells. 

Do not allow NiMH/NiCd cells to come in contact with moisture or water at any time. 







E[6E&








Do not leave a NiMH/NiCd battery unattended at any time while being charged or discharged.

'

E[6E&



E=7	E[6E&















E[6E&

	
'

E[6E&




!





\6

&	5Y
[



!



'  
 E[6E& 
 
  
 
  ,& 
 	  

 #&






	

$

Do not allow NiMH/NiCd cells to overheat at any time! Cells which reach greater than 140 degrees 


#KB&$

	


NiMH/NiCd cells will not charge fully when too cold or show full charge.


	


	




excessively hot disconnect the battery from the charger immediately!! Always inspect a battery which 




	



5	





in any way. 

Do not use a NiMH/NiCd battery if you suspect physical damage has occurred to the pack. Carefully 



	
	
!




'=E=7


9


!



		



	


	





5	
	

@B

'






Do not discharge NiMH/NiCd batteries at currents which exceed the discharge current rating of the 

battery.

Always store NiMH/NiCd cells/packs in a secure location away from children.

Never remove the SD card or turn off power 

while entering data.

Never store the SD card where it may be 

(






'8%'


excessive humidity or corrosive environments.

'  8  %' 
   


	

!

Always hold the SD card by the edges during 

installation and removal.

j
%'


direction.

Secure Digital (SD) Memory Card Handling Instructions

	
			
	!"	"	
$
<Introduction> 9

	"
	\#	
	

7





		

)

,+!

6

2. Turn on the transmitter power and allow your transmitter to reach its home screen. 

@&



4. Turn on your receiver power. 

q7
	




9



	

the problem. 

 7

%
	

	
(7
		


	
67

!

K%



7. Complete a full range check. 

L	

!


!


your motor/engine. 

9. Turn off receiver power. 

10. Turn off transmitter power. 

	 
     
 
    
 

 

 
    	


	 
     
 	 5  
5    



8



(


Q"
		

	#
#	

		\			

		

		"
	#	
	
	"
	"
	

!	!L			
E	B			GG
	
!















In order to maintain complete control of your aircraft it is important that it remains visible at all 

times

(

'



	

	
	
!

		#
	"
	

L	


	#	\#"E'




	


	





	



	

	

	






	













	 	 	 "
	 
 Water or moisture may enter the transmitter through the antenna or stick 

openings and cause erratic operation or loss of control. If you must fly in wet weather during a 

     
 
  
 
 
  
	 
 E 	
 	

lightning is expected. 
10 <Before Use>

BEFORE USE 

Features 

FASSTest system

The T14SG transmitter has adopted the newly developed bidirectional communication system 

"FASSTest".Data from the receiver can be checked in your transmitter. FASSTest is a maximum 14 

channels (linear 12 channels + switch 2 channels) 2.4GHz dedicated system.

S.BUS2 system

By using the S.BUS2 system multiple servos, gyros and telemetry sensors are easily installed with a 

minimum amount of cables. 

Model types

Six swash types are available for helicopters. Six types of main wings and three types of tail wings are 

available for airplanes and gliders. Functions and mixing functions necessary for each model type are set in 

advance at the factory.

Data input

Large graphic LCD and new type Touch Sensor substantially improve ease of setup.

Stick

Improved feel, adjustable length and tension.

Ni-MH battery

T14SG is operated by a 6.0 V/1,800 mAh Nickel-Metal Hydride battery.

SD card (Secure Digital memory card) (Not included)

Model data can be saved to an SD card (SD:32MB-2GB SDHC:4GB-32GB). When T14SG transmitter 

	


	



%'



Edit button

Two edit buttons are provided, and the operating screen can be immediately “Returned” to the HOME 

screen during operation. Setting operation can be performed easily by combining this button with a touch 

sensor.

Vibration function

Selects a function that alerts the operator to various alarms and timers by vibrating the transmitter in 

addition to sounding a buzzer.
<Before Use> 11

2
	
	7
"
	



#%



(
$

Your 14SG includes the following components:

7,0%3
	



\`BBL%j\

7q,LBBjE[

&


J5
	
7DD,BBj67D,`BBjJ


!

%


E!


*The set contents depend on the type of set.

Transmitter T14SG 

(2-stick, 14-channel, FASSTest-2.4G system) 

Transmitting frequency: 2.4GHz band

%
)%%7,0&%%7,D&%%7[^J7%%7`&%5%%


+
)KB7q,LBBjE[



Receiver R7008SB

(FASSTest-2.4G system, dual antenna diversity, S.BUS system)

+)@``0


	_%&#,$

%Y)B{L8,LK8BqK#D0{80`@8,0@$

Weight: 0.38 oz. (10.9g)

(*1) When using ESC's make sure that the regulated output capacity meets your usage application.

Note: The battery in the T14SG transmitter is not connected to the battery 

connector at initial. Please connect the battery connector before use.
12 <Before Use>

7q,LBBj7



!5#,LBB$
E[


!





8

	


	8


7DD,BBj67D,`BBj7
J


!


8

spacer. However, charge with the charger only for LiFe.

7
5










by placing the instructor on a separate transmitter. Note that the T14SG transmitter may be 

connected to another T14SG system, as well as to any other models of Futaba transmitters. The 

T14SG transmitter uses one of the three cord plug types according to the transmitter connected. 

(Refer to the description at the TRAINER function instructions). The part number of this cord is: 

^7[00Bq

%5

!	+
		




the model and the purpose of using you. If you utilize a S.BUS system, you should choose a S.BUS 

servo. An analog servo cannot be used if "FASSTest12CH mode" is used.

7
  5 
 
 
 
     Y 


communication system and to acquire the information from a model high up in the sky. 

 [Temperature sensor : SBS-01T] [Altitude sensor : SBS-01A] [RPM sensor magnet type : SBS01RM][RPM sensor optical type : SBS-01RO] [GPS sensor : SBS-01G] [Voltage sensor : SBS01V]

E!
5
!



7,0%3

!








9
9

~5
853

8
~5


a heavy-duty version with heavier wire, are available to aid in your larger model and other 

installations.

3
5


	





	


	

35	



(





head speed regardless of blade pitch, load, weather, etc.

\5
	




	

(Receivers for FASSTest and FASST,S-FHSS types are available.)

=
&
5

&\5DBBBE[6E&7
6\j

&


The following additional accessories are available from your dealer. Refer to a Futaba catalog 

for more information:
<Before Use> 13

●Antenna ●Monitor LED

●LCD

●Battery Cover

●Neck Strap Attachment

●Switch(SA,SB,SE,SF) ●Switch(SC,SD,SG,SH)

●Slide Lever(LS)

●Slide Lever(RS)

●Digital Trim

 (T3,T4)

●Power Switch

●Volume(LD,RD)

●Stick ●Stick

●Digital Trim

 (T1,T2)

●U.MENU/MON.

(User Menu/

Servo Monitor)

Button

●HOME/EXIT

 Button

*It slides upwards and turns on.

●SensorTouchTM

 (SYS,LNK,

 MDL,RTN,S1)

(J1)

(J2)

(J4)

(J3)

Transmitter controls
14 <Before Use>

Transmitter's Antenna:

As with all radio frequency transmissions, 

the strongest area of signal transmission is from 

the sides of the transmitter's antenna. As such, 

the antenna should not be pointed directly at the 

	






easily move the antenna to correct this situation.

LED (Left)

Displays the "non-default condition" warning.

	

 

   
  
 








LED (Right)

Displays the state of radio frequency 

transmission.



 







 

 
	!


	

 	

!


Monitor LED display

The status of the transmitter is displayed by 

LED at the bottom left and right sides of the 

"T14SG" logo.

Rotating antenna

The antenna can be rotated 90 degrees and angled 

90 degrees. Forcing the antenna further than this 

can damage it. The antenna is not removable.

Caution

Please do not grasp the transmitter's 




	#	\#"E	

Doing so may degrade the quality of the RF 

transmission to the model

Do not carry the transmitter by the 

antenna.

There is the danger that the antenna wire will break 

and operation will become impossible.

Do not pull the antenna forcefully.

There is the danger that the antenna wire will break 

and operation will become impossible.

Low power

High power High power

It is not good for there to 

be a model on flight in the 

direction tip of an antenna.

If you have a transmitter 

at an angle of a figure, an 

antenna will be good to use 

it, bending 90 degrees.

90°

90°
<Before Use> 15

Switch (SA-SH) 

"#$


"% &'$(%

("



" &'$(%

()	



"* &'$(%

()	



"+ &'$(%

("



", &'$(%

("



" &-$(%

()	



". &'$(%

("



"/ &-$(0!
()	



~

=E6=5

the setting screen of the mixing functions.

Slide Lever 

 

LS RS

LS (Left), RS (right):

The slide lever LS and RS offer analog input. 

*The T14SG transmitter beeps when the lever comes to the 

center.

~ 
  
   
   

direction on the setting screen of mixing functions.

HOME/EXIT and U.MENU/MON. Button 

Volume

LD RD

Volume LD and RD:

The volume LD and RD knobs allow for 

analog input. 

*The T14SG transmitter beeps when the volume knob 

reaches the center position.

~

	8	


	


Digital Trim

T4 T3 T2 T1

Digital Trim T1, T2, T3 and T4:

This transmitter is equipped with four (4) 

digital trims. Each time you press a trim button, 

the trim position moves one step. If you continue 

pressing it, the trim position starts to move faster. 

In addition, when the trim position returns to 


~





monitor trim positions by referencing the LCD 

screen. 

~






on the home screen on the T1-T4 setting screen within the 

linkage menu.

Note: The trim positions you have set will be stored in the 

non-volatile memory and will remain there. 

HOME/EXIT 

Button

U.MENU/MON.

Button

RETURN

Press Return to the previous 

screen

Press and hold Return to the Home 

screen

It pushes from HOME 

screen. To TELEMETRY display 

Push and hold for 

one (1) second from 

HOME screen.

Key lock On or Off

Press To SERVO MONITOR display

Press and hold To User Menu display

HOME/EXIT:

U.MENU/MON.:
16 <Before Use>

SensorTouchTM operation Condition Working

s3HORTgTAPg

S1

If the screen has more than one page. (Ex. P-MIX screen) The cursor moves to the top of next page.

If the screen have only one (1) page. The cursor moves to the top of page.

If inputting data while the cursor is blinking. The input data is canceled.

RTN

At the moving cursor mode. Change to the input data mode.

While in the data input mode. Changes to the moving cursor mode.

While inputting data while cursor is blinking. The data is entered.

s4WOSHORTgTAPSg

SYS At all screens Jump to System Menu screen directly.

LNK At all screens Jump to Linkage Menu screen directly.

MDL At all screens Jump to Model Menu screen directly.

s4OUCHANDHOLDFOR

one (1) second. S1 At the HOME screen Key lock On or Off

RTN While inputting data with no blinking cursor. Reset to the initialized value.

s3CROLLING

Outline

OF

 “RTN”

Lightly circling the outside edge of the RTN button. The cursor moves accordingly.

During the data input mode. Increases or decreases values accordingly.

Touch sensor operation

Data input operation is performed using the touch sensor.

Movement of cursor, value input or mode 

selection:

Movement of the cursor on the menu screen 

and movement of the cursor among items on a 

setup screen can be controlled by scrolling your 

	
	





~


also go to the next page, if there is a next page.

This scrolling technique is also used for data 

input, value input, mode selection, and similar 

operations. Examples include: Value, ON, OFF, 

INH, ACT, etc.

RTN button:

Touch the RTN button when you want to open 

a setup screen or to switch between cursor move 

mode (reverse display) and data input mode (box 

display).

This button can also be used as the enter button 








screen, etc.

S1 button:

When there is a next page on a menu screen or 

setup screen, you can go to that page by touching 

the S1 button. In this case, the cursor moves to 

the screen title item of the page.

Exiting setup screen:

To end the operation on a setup screen and 

return to the menu screen, move the cursor to the 

screen title item and touch the RTN button.

To return to home screen directly, touch the S1 

button for 1 second.

Alternatively, move the cursor to the screen 

title item and touch the RTN button to return to 

the home screen from a menu screen.
<Before Use> 17

Note:

%
)&
	

the RTN button. The sensors may mis-read your touch as 

a reverse rotation if the circle is smaller, or performed on 

the inside edge of the RTN button. 

* The SensorTouchTM may not operate smoothly if your 

hand is touching the surrounding case parts. Please make 

sure that the tip of your finger is actually operating the 

SensorTouchTM. 

*If the SensorTouchTM does not register your input, please 

try again after lightly tapping your finger on the sensor 

once again.

* Do not operate the SensorTouchTM while wearing gloves. 

The SensorTouchTM may not work correctly. 

Caution

The touch sensor may not operate 

correctly if spark noise is generated from 

a gasoline engine, etc. Please remove the 

transmitter to a location away from the 

noise source. 

Stick Adjustment

Adjustment of the stick lever length

~

(	!


you like. It is recommended to adjust the length 

of the sticks in line with your hand size. 

1/



22





2%2
3
#


 





-#


3
2%2





3
22
$	




A

Lever Head 

B

Lever Head 

Adjustment of stick lever tension

The tension of the self-return type stick lever 

can be adjusted.

14 
!
 
 
 
  


 !
!

54$	


 


!

 
!


!


-
54	4
!

!
6



 
7
	0
14




!






5$





'8	
!

!



 
	$

s3IDE#OVER

s)TISONLYTHEMODE

s2EAR'RIP

It removes 

from here

*It is difficult to remove rear grips from the central 

site of a transmitter. 

Therefore, remove from the outside of rear grips.

s2EAR'RIP
18 <Before Use>

9%

:!
4
3





	$

;8
!
$

:


$	
	$

 	


:	



:

*Turning the screw clockwise increases the tension.

 *%8#<& <  
 
 
 

!4



$






#  
            


:
  

=





+ screw is clockwise.

Stick tension maximum Stick tension minimum 

+ screw is counter-clockwise.

A screw is kept 

from coming out 

from a line.

*The screw will touch the case.

s3TICK4ENSION*	

(Mode 1/2)

s3TICK4ENSION*	

(Mode 2) s3TICK4ENSION*	

(Mode 1/2)

s3TICK4ENSION*	

(Mode 1)
<Before Use> 19

SD Card (Secure Digital memory card) (Not 

included)

The T14SG transmitter model data can be 

stored by using any commonly found SD card. 

When T14SG transmitter update software is 

released, the software is updated using an SD 

card. The T14SG is capable of using SD cards 

with a memory size SD : 32MB-2GB SDHC : 

4GB-32GB.

Inserting/removing the SD card

1#
!
$



$

 


 !


!


-#
"+


>	


 


Caution

Be sure to turn off the power to the 

transmitter before inserting or removing 

the SD card.

 As the SD card is a precision device, do 

not use excessive force when inserting.

Restrictions when using an SD card

The following restrictions apply when using an 

SD card:

*The SD card must first be initialized using the T14SG 

dedicated format. The SD card cannot be used as is 

without formatting to the T14SG.

*Initializing destroys all the data previously saved on the 

card.

*An SD card formatted to the T14SG cannot be written 


	
+&<_87

must be converted and written by the Futaba File System 

	


	


This special conversion software can be downloaded from 

Futaba's web site at: 

 http://www.futaba-rc.com/software-updates.html

1 Push to open.

2Slide in the direction of the 

arrow on the battery cover. 

3 Battery cover will open downward. ery cover will open downward

SD card slot
20 <Before Use>

[Inserting the card]

 #
"+







!







+





[Removing the card]

 7

"+$


	4


 



!


 

!


'*

 



SD card initialization

To use an SD card with the T14SG, the card 

	
=	



does not have to be reformatted. Formatting is 

performed by the T14SG.

 ?<0
#%#@7
"+!


 
 #1;".4  $
3
5	  



Do not format a card containing 

important data. 

[Formatting procedure]

1<

"+
"+


#1;".

-#  
 #1;". $
 7
 

!



#1;".4




 
$$


'<
#1;".
!4!



  ?0%#@   
 #

 #
!	4!



  ?*%*,)@   
 #

 

;0

?A,"@
#

 

* Formatting starts. During formatting, the [NOW 

FORMATTING...] message is displayed.

*When formatting is completed, The [FORMAT 

COMPLETED] message is displayed. Depending on the 

card capacity and speed, formatting may take as long as 

several minutes.

[IMPORTANT] Do not turn off the power until 

the [FORMAT COMPLETED] message is 

displayed.

9,!	 	
# 

SD card reader/writer

Saving model data and update files (released 

from Futaba) to the SD card from your own 

PC, you can transfer those file to your T14SG 

transmitter. Equipment for reading and writing 

SD cards is available at most electronics stores. 

Stored data

If you have a problem saving or reading data 

after a long period of use, we suggest obtaining a 

%'

		

*Futaba is not responsible for compensating any failure or 

damage to the data stored in the memory card. As such, 

we suggest that you maintain a backup of your important 

data contained on your SD card.
<Before Use> 21

Connector/Plug

Connector for trainer function

When you use the trainer function, connect the 

optional trainer cable between the transmitters 

for teacher and student.

~

	7


screen in the System menu.

S.BUS connector (S.I/F)

When setting an S.BUS servo and telemetry 

sensor, connect them both here. 

#%
@5

~5
$

Earphone plug

It is not used now. (The function after upgrade)

Warning

Do not connect any other chargers except 

the special charger to this charging 

connector.

	

!E[

7q,LBBj	

transmitter, you can use the optional quick charger CR2000 corresponding to NiMH battery. 

Trainer

Connector

S.BUS (S.I/F)

Connector

Earphone

Plug

Connector for battery charger

This is the connector for charging the NiMH 



 7q,LBBj 
  
  

transmitter. Do not use any other chargers except 

the attached special charger corresponding to 

NiMH battery.

Charge

Plug
22 <Before Use>

Installation and Removal of the HT5F1800B 

Transmitter Battery

Attachment of the battery

1"

 


 !


!

	


$


-<
 




'*

 



;*

 

!$



Battery Removal

Note: If you remove the battery while the 

power is on, the data you have set will not 

be saved.

1$

 



-+

 



'


 



 $


 

!


;*

 

!$



Warning

 Be careful not to drop the battery.

Never disconnect the battery connector 

from the T14SG transmitter after 

turning off the power until the screen is 

completely blank and the transmitter has 

shut down completely. 

* Internal devices such as memories may be damaged.

* If there is any problem, the message "Backup Error" 

will be shown the next time when you turn on the 

power of the transmitter. Do not use the transmitter as 

it is. Send it to the Futaba Service Center.

1 Push to open.

2Slide in the direction of the 

arrow on the battery cover. 

3 Battery cover will open downward. ery cover will open downward

Battery Battery 

Connector release tab
<Before Use> 23

When exchanging for the LiFe battery 

(FT2F2100B/FT2F1700B) of an option.

Attachment of the battery

1#1;"./#91BCC
!


-  % )
 $
 1;". !
 



>	


'%)
 
$



>	


;-
 
   )
 
 





9*

 

!$



6 . T 1 4 S G i s t u r n e d o n a n d [ L I N K A G E 

MENU]=>[WARNING]=>[LOW BATTERY] is 

called.

7. It changes into 6.0V from 5.6V.

Charge of a LiFe battery

Note: LiFe battery cannot be charged with the 

charger of 14SG attachment. 

Be sure to remove a battery from T14SG and 

to charge from the charger only for LiFe.

Warning

Follow the manual of a LiFe battery.

Don't charge the LiFe battery with the 

NiMH charger of 14SG attachment. 

* Be sure to remove from T14SG and to charge with the 

charger only for LiFe.

Be sure to change the voltage of LOW 

BATTERY WARNING into 6.0V from 

5.6V

 
 $  



LiFe SPACER

LiFe

Battery

The balance charge connector is not connected 

in the state where the battery is set to a transmitter.

A LiFe 

battery is 

removed 

from T14SG.

Balance charge 

is carried out from the charger only for LiFe.

2P connector is 

removed from T14SG.

The battery state inside T14SG

NiMH HT5F1800B

LiFe FT2F2100B/1700B

LiFe SPACER

*About low battery voltage, all the models included in 

one transmitter are changed in common. It cannot set to 

different voltage for every model. Moreover, data reset is 

not carried out.
24 <Before Use>

Link/Mode Switch

Use the small plastic screw driver that was 

included with your receiver. 

The Link/Mode Switch is also used for the CH 

mode selection. 

Extra Voltage Connector

Use this connector when using a voltage 

telemetry device to send the battery voltage (DC0 

`B$	


~

_8




#&5\E5`BB$^7[qqq,

~ 
  
! 
 
  
 8


connector to the External voltage connector.

Receiver nomenclature

Before using the receiver, be sure to read the 

precautions listed in the following pages.

Receiver R7008SB

Connector

"1 through 6": outputs for the channels 1 

through 6

£`6j£)	`



"8/SB": outputs of 8 channels or S.BUS port.

[S.BUS Servo S.BUS Gyro ]

*When using 8/SB as S.BUS, you have to set 

CH MODE of the following page to mode B or 

mode D.

"S.BUS2": outputs of S.BUS2 port.

[S.BUS2 Servo S.BUS2 Gyro Telemetry Sensor ]

*When using 9 or more channels, use an S.BUS 

	
\`BBL%j
!

to your transmitter.

Connector insertion 

Firmly insert the connector in the direction 

%j^%D

it 90 degrees.

+

-

Do not connect either a switch 

or battery in this manner.

5HFHLYHU

Danger

 Danger

Don't connect a connector, as shown in a 



	#
E

*It will short-circuit, if it connected in this way. A short 

circuit across the battery terminals may cause abnormal 





Warning

S.BUS2 connectors

Don't connect an S.BUS servo / gyro to 

S.BUS2 connector.

LED Monitor 

This monitor is used to check the CH mode of 

the receiver.
<Before Use> 25

R7008SB CH Mode

7 \`BBL%j   
 
 


unit. It has 8 PWM outputs, S.BUS and S.BUS2 

outputs. Additionally the PWM outputs can be 

changed from channels 1-8 to channels 9-14. If 

you only desire to use it as an 8 channel receiver 

(without S.BUS), it can be used without any 

setting changes.

The T14SG has the ability to link to two 

\`BBL%j=	

channels 1-8 and the other outputting channels 

9-14 giving you 14 PWM channels. Instructions 

for this configuration and S.BUS operation 

follow.

¤
\`BBL%j&
¥

1


)D0
 


ECCB"




-#




	


 )D0
   
  
 ),+

 
	 	

D

 !

 





'#
),+ 
 	



 
 $
 
 
  
 

 


; , $
  
 0
D) 








5!


97


!


$

4$

0
D

) !
-


F



!



),+	


E







$


 	
		
*


0


Receiver connector

Setting channel

Mode A

1 ~ 8CH

Mode B

1 ~ 7CH

Mode C

9 ~ 14CH

Mode D

9 ~ 14CH

1 1199

2 2 2 10 10

3 3 3 11 11

4 4 4 12 12

5 5 5 13 13

6 6 6 14 14

7/B 7 7 - -

8/SB 8 S.BUS - S.BUS

Red LED blink 1time 2time 3time 4time

R7008SB CH MODE TABLE

Danger

Don't touch wiring. 

* There is a danger of receiving an electric shock.

Do not short-circuit the battery terminals.

* A short circuit across the battery terminals may cause 







Please double check your polarity ( + and 

- ) when hooking up your connectors.

* If + and - of wiring are mistaken, it will damage, 

ignite and explode.

Don’t connection to Extra Voltage before 

turning on a receiver power supply.
26 <Before Use>

Receiver's Antenna Installation

7\`BBL%j



8Y


	



has adopted a diversity antenna system. This allows the receiver to obtain RF signals on both antennas and 


5	

Antenna

*Must be kept as straight as possible.

Coaxial cable

R7008SB Receiver

To obtain the best results of the diversity 

function, please refer to the following 

instructions: 

1#

! 

$	

$ 










	


-#

 
$
GC


	





 #	
4 
!

!$	

$



!

!$ 


 )	
 !
  
 	
 !


 :



	<




 
$


 

!
#

 


	 
H	




'#

! 

$!


 !
4   !
4

 
 


#
5$








	

4 

 
	

;I

$

!
!4

,"*4


!

$ 


*The two antennas should be placed at 90 degrees to each other. 

*The Illustration demonstrates how the antenna should be placed. 

*Receiver Vibration and Waterproofing: The receiver contains precision electronic parts. Be sure to avoid vibration, 

shock, and temperature extremes. For protection, wrap the receiver in foam rubber or other vibration-absorbing 

materials. It is also a good idea to waterproof the receiver by placing it in a plastic bag and securing the open end of the 

bag with a rubber band before wrapping it with foam rubber. If you accidentally get moisture or fuel inside the receiver, 

you may experience intermittent operation or a crash. If in doubt, return the receiver to our service center for service.

Antenna Antenna
<Before Use> 27

Rubber 

 grommet 

Brass eyelet 

Wood screw 

Servo mount 

2.3-2.6mm nut 

washer 

Rubber 

 grommet 

Brass eyelet 

Servo mount 

2.3-2.6mm screw 

(Airplane/Glider) (Helicopter) 

Servo lead wires 

To prevent the servo lead cable from being 

broken by vibration during flight, provide a 

little slack in the cable and fasten it at suitable 

points. Periodically check the cable during daily 

maintenance.

Fasten about 5-10cm 

from the servo outlet so 

that the lead wire is neat.

Margin in the lead wire.

Mounting the power switch 

When mounting a power switch to an airframe, 

make a rectangular hole that is a little larger than 

the total stroke of the switch so that you can turn 

the switch ON/OFF without binding. 

Avoid mounting the switch where it can be 

covered by engine oil and dust. In general, it is 

recommended to mount the power switch on the 

		

	

Safety precautions when you install 

receiver and servos

Warning

Connecting connectors

Be sure to insert the connector until it 

stops at the deepest point.

How to protect the receiver from vibration 

and water

Wrap the receiver with something soft 

such as foam rubber to avoid vibration. 

If there is a chance of getting wet, put the 

receiver in a waterproof bag or balloon to 

avoid water.

Receiver's antenna

Never cut the receiver's antenna. Do not 

bind the receiver's antenna with the cables 

for servos.

Locate the receiver's antenna as far as 

possible from metals or carbon fiber 

components such as frames, cables, etc.

*Cutting or binding the receiver's antenna will reduce the 

radio reception sensitivity and range, and may cause a 

crash.

Servo throw

Adjust your system so that pushrods will 

not bind or sag when operating the servos 

to the full extent.

*If excessive force is continuously applied to a servo, the 

servo could be damaged due to force on the gear train 

and/or power consumption causing rapid battery drain. 

Mounting servos

Use a vibration-proof rubber (such as 

rubber grommet) under a servo when 

mounting the servo on a servo mount. And 

be sure that the servo cases do not touch 

directly to the metal parts such as servo 

mount.

*If the servo case contacts the airframe directly, vibration 

will travel to and possibly damage the servo. 

Mounting the Servo 
28 <Before Use>

S.BUS/S.BUS2 Installation

7%j^%6%j^%D
7





with models that use a large number of servos. In addition, the wings can be quickly installed to the fuselage 

without any erroneous wiring by the use of only one simple wire, even when there are a large number of 

servos used.

¦<%j^%6%j^%D

8







¦7%j^%6%j^%DY	
#%
7,0%3$

¦7%j^%6%j^%D



#
&$
8

Receiver: R7008SB

Battery: FR2F1800 ( Optional )

Switch: HSW-L

Throttle servo: BLS173SV ( Optional )

Aileron servo: BLS174SV×2 ( Optional )

Elevator servo: BLS173SV×2 ( Optional )

Rudder Servo: BLS175SV×1 ( Optional )

HUB×3 ( Optional )

Receiver: R7008SB

Servo: S3172SV×9 ( Optional )

HUB×4 ( Optional )

S.BUS Glider usage example

S.BUS Aerobatic plane usage example
<Before Use> 29

S.BUS Wiring example

%DWWHU\

%DWWHU\

*<

([WHQVLRQ

FRUG

6ZLWFK

6ZLWFK

7HUPLQDOER[

+8%

+8% +8%

+8% +8%

+8%

+8%

ق$QRWKHUSRZHUVXSSO\ك

+8%

6%866HUYR

6%866HUYR

Receiver

●S.BUS Servo

 Since the channel number is memorized by 

the S.BUS itself, any connector can be used. 

When the SBD-1 (sold separately) is used, 

ordinary servos can be used with the

S.BUS system.

●When separate power supply used

 When a large number of servos are used or 

when high current servos are used, the servos 

can be driven by a separate power supply by 

using a separate Power Supply 3-way Hub.

●7HUPLQDOER[

Four connectors can be inserted

 Three connectors can be 

inserted.

 Used when using a separate 

power supply battery.

6%86

3RUW

6%

Orange

Green

*When using 8/SB as S.BUS, you must set the receiver to 

Mode B or Mode D. See R7008SB CH MODE TABLE.

Warning

Power supply

Please make sure that you 

use a battery that can deliver 

enough capacity for the 

number and kind of servos 

used. Alkaline batteries 

cannot be used.
30 <Before Use>

S.BUS2 System

 When using the S.BUS2 port, an impressive array of telemetry sensors may be utilized. 

Receiver port S.BUS Servo

S.BUS Gyro

S.BUS2 Servo

S.BUS2 Gyro Telemetry sensor

S.BUS ○ ○ ×

S.BUS2 × (※) ○ ○

S.BUS2 TABLE

(※)Don't connect S.BUS Servo, 

S.BUS Gyro to S.BUS2 connector. 

6%86

3RUW

6%86

3RUW

6%

+XE

+XE +XE +XE

5XGGHU6HUYR

6%866HUYR 6%866HUYR

6%86VHUYR

&RQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH

6%86J\UR

&RQQHFWLRQLVSRVVLEOH

6%86VHUYR

&RQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH

7HOHPHWU\VHQVRU

&RQQHFWLRQLVLPSRVVLEOH

6%86

*<52

&+0RGHLVVHWWR0RGH%>'@

ٔ

7HOHPHWU\

6HQVRU

S.BUS servos and gyros and S.BUS2 servos and gyros must be used in the 

correct receiver ports. Please refer to the instruction manual to make sure 

you connect to the correct one.
<Before Use> 31

S.BUS/S.BUS2 device setting

S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or a telemetry sensor can be connected directly to the T14SG. Channel setting and 

other data can be entered for the S.BUS/S.BUS2 servos or sensors. 

'3 

A3



6%866%86

6HUYR

6%866%86

GHYLFH

7HOHPHWU\VHQVRU

5HFHLYHUV

%DWWHU\

76*

1*

"8"

 



'3 A3




>	


-#
!
$


'*

$



"
&"
!0
→"8""


"
&)	
0
→"


;

!
	







9#






"8"
4

!


 




"8"





32 <Before Use>

Telemetry System

7\`BBL%j	
5


%%7




the S.BUS2 port. Using the S.BUS2 port an impressive array of telemetry sensors may be utilized. It also 

includes both standard PWM output ports and S.BUS output ports.

* Telemetry is available only in the FASSTest 14CH mode. (12CH mode displays only Receiver battery 

voltage and Extra battery voltage.)

7
	#\`BBL%j$

77,0%3
!'	\`BBL%j
!

6%86

&RQQHFWRU

7HPSHUDWXUH

6HQVRU Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3 ~ 5

Slot 6

Slot 7

Slot 8 ~ 15

Slot 16

Receiver

Battery voltage is 

displayed at the transmitter.

Drive battery voltage is 

displayed at the transmitter.

6ZLWFK

76*

7HUPLQDOER[

+8%

+8%

+8%

Info

Info

Info

Info

Info

voltage

Signal

530

6HQVRU

$OWLWXGH

6HQVRU

9ROWDJH

6HQVRU

*36

6HQVRU

Slot 17




6HQVRU




6HQVRU




6HQVRU

●Telemetry sensor (sold separately)

Your aircrafts data can be checked in the 

transmitter by connecting various telemetry 

sensors to the S.BUS2 connector of the 

receiver.

●Slot No.

Servos are classified by channel, but sensors 

are classified by “slot” . Since the initial slot 

No. of the T14SG is preset at each sensor, 

the sensors can be used as is by connecting 

them. There are 1~31 slots. Info
<Basic Operation> 33

BASIC OPERATION

How to charge the NiMH battery HT5F1800B 

for the transmitter

Danger

The NiMH battery HT5F1800B is only for 

your T14SG. Do not use this battery for other 

equipment.

Be sure to use the attached special charger to 

charge the battery.

*If you take the NiMH battery HT5F1800B out of the 

transmitter, you can use the optional quick charger CR-2000 

corresponding to NiMH battery.

[Method of charging battery]

*Connect to AC outlet 

specified.

Special charger

Receiver Batt.

Charging display

To T14SG charge 

 connector

Transmitter Batt.

Charging display

1. Connect the special charger to the wall 

socket (AC outlet).

2. Connect the connectors to the T14SG 

charging jack.

&


J_'


*Turn off the transmitter while charging the battery.

3. Remove the battery after 15 hours.

*Battery charging will not automatically stop. Remove the 

battery and transmitter from the charger and remove the 

charger from the wall socket.

*It is recommended to reactivate the battery by cycling 

several times if the battery has not been used for a long 

period. 

*In the case of NiMH/NiCd batteries, you may find poor 

performance of the battery if you have used the battery 

only for a short period or if you repeat charging while the 

battery is not fully discharged. It is suggested to discharge 

the battery to the recommended level after use. It is also 

recommended to charge the battery just before use. 

Battery Charging

Before charging batteries, read the "Cautions for handling battery and battery charger" in the section 

"NiMH/NiCd Battery Safety and Handling Instructions".
34 <Basic Operation>

How to turn transmitter power ON/OFF 

When turning on the power, the T14SG 

transmitter will begin emmiting RF automatically 


	\

The T14SG transmitter also offers the ability to 

auto shut-down.

When turning on the power of the transmitter

1. Turn on the power switch of the transmitter.

7
£&_&§\&=E'7=E£

	



	J_'!

2. Then, you will see the home screen and the 

transmitter begins to emit radio waves.

7	
J_'


How to stop the transmitter

1. Turn off the power switch of the transmitter.

*The transmitter shuts down at once.

Low battery alarm and auto shut-down

When the battery voltage reaches 5.2V, an 


 

   J
 
 

	

immediately.

When the battery voltage reaches 3.9V, the 

transmitter will be turned off automatically.

*If you do not operate the transmitter (or move a stick, 

knob, switch or digital trim) for 30 minutes, the message 

£+J_%_7^\E=+=<_\%<7&£




an audible alarm will sound.

Warning display at power ON (Airplane/

Helicopter) 

<!+=


the high side (or over 1/3 stick) a warning will be 

displayed. 

*below 1/3 stick, the warning display goes off.

Registration of the user's name

If so desired, the T14SG transmitter can 

indicate the owner's name. 

User's name setup screen

1. Turn on the power of the transmitter.

*The home screen appears.

2. Lightly touch the SYS button twice rapidly 

and the System menu appears.

3. Select [USER NAME] in the System menu and 

touch the RTN button.

*The user name set up screen appears.

 Input Box

*Current user name is displayed. 

Changing the user name

1. Change the user name as described below:

 [Moving cursor in input box]

 "

?}@?~@4
# 

 [Deleting a character]

 When [DELETE] is selected and the RTN button 

is touched, the character immediately after 

the cursor is deleted.

 [Adding a character]

 When a character is selected from the 

character list and the RTN button is touched, 

that character is added at the position 

immediately after the cursor.

*A name of up to 10 characters long can be entered as the 

user name. (A space is also counted as one character.)

2. At the end of input, select [ENTER] and tuoch 

the RTN button. (To terminate input and 

return to the original state, select [CANCEL] 

and touch the RTN button.)

THR Stick Slow
<Basic Operation> 35

Up/Down timer (ST1, ST2)

#!
$




 Touch the RTN button at the [xx]:[xx.

xx] item to start/stop the timer. 

 8

		4


touch the RTN button at the ST1 or ST2 

item to call the timer set-up screen. 

*See the description at the back of this manual.

Home screen

Digital trim (T1 to T4)

 #!$$




 A


$

on the home screen on the 

T1-T4 setting screen within the 

linkage menu.

Model Name

#
!
!


is currently used is 

displayed here. 

 8
 
  

highlight this, then 

touch the RTN button 

to call the model 

select set-up screen.

User's name

System timer

#
!
!



the latest reset. (Hour):(Minute)

8

		4


touch the RTN button for one second 

to reset the system timer.

^	






\7E

button. The setting screen appears.

RF indicator

Battery Indicator

 7
 
 
 	


reaches 5.2V(Change in 

Warning Menu), the alarm 

will beep. Land your aircraft 

immediately.

System mode

 "
!%""#
1;*/ 


mode is displayed here.

8

		4

then touch the RTN button 

to call the frequency set-up 

screen.

2nd Home screen

#
# 

the clock icon to call the 

2nd home screen (large 

size timer). 

Model timer

#
!
!


since the latest reset. (each model)

 (Hour):(Minute)

 8
 
   		 4

then touch the RTN button for one 

second to reset the model timer.

Key lock

 # 
 "1   $ 


HOME/EXIT button for one second to 

lock/unlock the key operation.

 In the key lock mode the key icon is 

displayed here.

Model type

SD card indicator

Condition name (Heli/Glider)

<
!4!



cursor to the condition name and 

touch the RTN button. The condition 

name is changed and blinks.

 It is possible to operate the digital 

trim in all conditions.

VPP condition # (Air)

7


	



4





# is displayed here.
36 <Basic Operation>

Warning

j
	





	

Check the battery voltage as often as 

possible and try to charge the battery 

earlier. If the battery alarm makes a sound, 

land your aircraft immediately.

User Menu

A user menu which allows the user to 

customize and display frequently used functions 

has been added.

1. When the "U.MENU" button is pushed for 

two seconds, the user menu appears.

\_ ̈7

while the user menu is being displayed.

2. When the cursor highlights the dotted line, 

"----------" and the RTN button is touched, 

the menu selection screen appears.

3. When the cursor is moved to the setting 

that you to set to the user menu and the 

RTN button is touched, that setting screen 

is added to the user menu.

4. The registered setting screen can be 

called by moving the cursor to it and 

touching the RTN button.

*When you want to delete an added screen from the user 

menu, highlight item you wish to delete, press and hold 

the RTN button for one second.
<Basic Operation> 37

 Link procedure (T14SG/R7008SB)

_






'



!'	

=!


the ID code is stored in the receiver and no further linking is necessary unless the receiver is to be used 

with another transmitter. When you purchase additional R7008SB receivers, this procedure is necessary; 

otherwise the receiver will not work. 

Link procedure

1


!







to each other within half (0.5m) meter.

2. Turn on the transmitter. 

3. Select [SYSTEM] at the Linkage menu and 

access the setup screen shown below by 

touching the RTN button.

4. When you use two receivers on one model, 

you must change from [SINGLE] to [DUAL].

 *Only two receivers can be used. In 

"DUAL", two setting items come out. Input, 

respectively.

922 






"G" general.

6. When changing battery fail-safe voltage 

from the initial value 3.8V, voltage is 

changed here. 

%""#
0


7.[LINK] is chosen by scrolling and the RTN 

button is pushed. The transmitter will emit a 

chime as it starts the linking process.

8. When the transmitter starts to chime, power 

on the receiver. The receiver should link to 

the transmitter within about 1 second. 

9. If linking fails, an error message is displayed. 

Bring the transmitter closer to the receiver 

and repeat the procedure above from Step 2.

10. ACT will be chosen if telemetry is used. 

It is INH when not using it.

Less than 0.5 m

In "Link" Mode

Receiver ON

:You can do this through the LINKAGE Menu 

and scroll to System and press RTN.

d this th h th LINK

<+   
!

receiver displays.

In DUAL, a primary receiver 

is link previously. Next, a 

secondary receiver is link.

ID of a Secondary 

receiver displays.
38 <Basic Operation>

11. When a telemetry function is enabled, 

the receiving interval (down-link interval) of 

sensor data can be changed. If a DL interval 

is increased, the response of the sensor data 

display becomes slower, but stick response 

will improve.

Initial value: 1.0s 

Adjustment range: 0.1s~2.0s

* If there are many FASSTest systems turned on around your 

receiver, it might not link to your transmitter. In this case, 

	J_'

	



the receiver might have established a link to one of other 

transmitters. This is very dangerous if you do not notice 

this situation. In order to avoid the problem, we strongly 

recommend you to doublecheck whether your receiver is 

really under control by your transmitter by giving the stick 

input and then checking the servo response.

*Do not perform the linking operation when the drive motor 

is connected or the engine is running.

* When you use two receivers, please be sure to setup a 

"primary" and "secondary" in the "dual" mode.

*Since two sets of receivers cannot be individually 

recognized without using a "primary" and "secondary" 

setup, it is impossible to receive telemetry data correctly. 

* You must link one receiver at a time. If both power 

supplies to the receivers are switched on simultaneously, 

data is received incorrectly by the transmitter.

* If a dual receiver function is used, in order to receive 

sensor information correctly by both sets, telemetry data 

will be slower compared to a single receiver setup. 

* You cannot link three receivers.

J!





J!



J!





Warning

After the linking is done, please cycle receiver 

power and check that the receiver to be linked 

is really under the control of the transmitter.

Do not perform the linking procedure with 

motor's main wire connected or with the engine 

operating as it may result in serious injury.
<Basic Operation> 39

Range Testing Your R/C System 

It is extremely important to range check your models prior to each flying session. This enables you to 



	



8(
	



The T14SG transmitter incorporates a system that reduces its power output and allows you to perform such 

a range check.

Range check mode 

We have installed a special "Range check 

mode" for doing a ground range check. To access 

the "Range check mode" touch and hold the RTN 

button while turning on the transmitter. Doing so 

+=<_\[='_

To activate the "Range check mode" touch the 

RTN button and the range check mode screen will 

appear. 

During this mode, the RF power output is 

reduced so the range test can be performed. In 

addition, when this mode is activated the right 

J_'		

!

and the transmitter gives users a warning with a 

beeping sound every 3 seconds. 

The "Range check mode" continues for 90 

seconds and after that the power will return 

to the normal level. To exit the "Range check 

£	{B£\E3_

&_&§£
	


RTN button again. This mode is available one 

time only so if you need to re-use this function the 



E__\



£\
!£


Should you require additional time to perform 

a range check, highlight Restart before your time 

expires and press the RTN button one time.

Range check procedure

1. With the "Range check mode" on, walk 

away from the model while simultaneously 

operating the controls. Have an assistant 

stand by the model to confirm that all 

controls are completely and correctly 

operational. You should be able to walk 

approximately 30-50 paces from the model 

without losing control. 

2. If everything operates correctly, return to 

the model. Set the transmitter in a safe, yet 

accessible, location so it will be within reach 

after starting the engine or motor. Be certain 

the throttle stick is in the low throttle position, 


  
 
	
  ! 

!

another range check with your assistant 

holding the aircraft with the engine running 

at various speeds. If the servos jitter or move 

inadvertently, there may be a problem. We 

			
H




> 



!


Look for loose servo connections or binding 

pushrods. Also, be certain that the battery 

has been fully charged.

The present model

About 100 feet

Range check mode

Range checking on 

low power. 

Warning

'

!

*Since the range of the radio waves is short, if the model 

is too far from the transmitter, control will be lost and the 

model will crash.
40 <Receiver and Servo Installation>

RECEIVER AND SERVO INSTALLATION

Receiver switch

Receiver battery

Charging port

Servos

R7008SB (output connector section)

sCH1~6: Output connectors 1~6

s"/UTPUTCONNECTORSAND0OWERSUPPLY

s3"/UTPUTCONNECTORSOR3"53SYSTEM

s3"533"53SYSTEM

CH1~8,

S.BUS/(2), 

B

Receiver and servos connection diagram

Always connect the necessary number of servos.

The receiver channel assignment depends on the 

model type. See the Servo connection by model 

type tables.

Receiver and servos connection

Connect the receiver and servos in accordance with the connection diagram shown below. Always read the 

section [Before using]. When mounting the receiver and servos to the fuselage, connect the necessary points 

in accordance with the model's instruction manual.
<Receiver and Servo Installation> 41

Servo connection by model type

The T14SG transmitter channels are automatically assigned for optimal combination according to the type 

selected with the Model Type function of the Linkage Menu. The channel assignment (initial setting) for 

each model type is shown below. Connect the receiver and servos to match the type used.

*The set channels can be checked at the Function screen of the Linkage Menu. The channel assignments can also be changed. For 

more information, read the description of the Function menu.

Airplane/glider

Normal wing and V-tail

1Aileron 2Aileron 2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP

Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider

1 Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron

2 Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator

3 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder

4 Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

5 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX6 Gear AUX5 Flap Flap Aileron3 Aileron3

6 VPP AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap2 Flap2 Aileron4 Aileron4

7 AUX5 AUX5 VPP AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Flap3 Flap3 Flap Flap

8 AUX4 AUX4 AUX5 AUX5 VPP AUX5 Flap2 Flap2 Flap4 Flap4 Flap2 Flap2

9 AUX1 AUX1 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber

10 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Butterfly AUX1 Butterfly VPP Butterfly Gear Butterfly Gear Butterfly

11 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor

12 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 VPP AUX1 VPP AUX1

DG1 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW

DG2 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW

1Aileron 2Aileron 2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP

Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider

1 Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron

2 Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator

3 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder

4 Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

5 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX6 Elevator2 Elevator2 Flap Flap Aileron3 Aileron3

6 VPP AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap2 Flap2 Aileron4 Aileron4

7 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Flap3 Flap3 Flap Flap

8 AUX4 AUX4 VPP AUX5 Elevator2 Elevator2 Flap2 Flap2 Flap4 Flap4 Flap2 Flap2

9 AUX1 AUX1 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber

10 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Butterfly VPP Butterfly Gear Butterfly Gear Butterfly Gear Butterfly

11 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 VPP AUX1 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor

12 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2 Elevator2

DG1 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW

DG2 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW RXRX

CH

CH

FASST 7CHS-FHSSFASSTest 12CHFASSTest 14CH FASST MULT

FASST 7CHS-FHSSFASSTest 12CHFASSTest 14CH FASST MULT

Ailvator (Dual Elevator)

CH of each 

The output 

system

CH of each 

The output 

system
42 <Receiver and Servo Installation>

Flying wing, Delta wing (Winglet 2 Rudder)

Flying wing, Delta wing

2Aileron 2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP

Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider

1 Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron

2 VPP AUX4 VPP AUX4 VPP AUX4 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

3 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Rudder Rudder Aileron3 Aileron3

4 Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder VPP AUX4 Aileron4 Aileron4

5 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX6 Gear AUX6 Flap Flap Rudder Rudder

6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Flap Flap Flap2 Flap2 VPP AUX4

7 AUX6 AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap3 Flap3 Flap Flap

8 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 Flap2 Flap2 Flap4 Flap4 Flap2 Flap2

9 Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator

10 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber

11 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Butterfly AUX1 Butterfly Gear Butterfly Gear Butterfly

12 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor

DG1 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW

DG2 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW RX

CH

FASST 7CHS-FHSSFASSTest 12CHFASSTest 14CH FASST MULT

RX 2Aileron 2Aileron+1FLAP 2Aileron+2FLAP 2Aileron+4FLAP 4Aileron+2FLAP

Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider Airplane Glider

1 Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron Aileron

2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Rudder2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2

3 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Throttle Motor Rudder Rudder Aileron3 Aileron3

4 Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder Rudder2 Rudder2 Aileron4 Aileron4

5 Gear AUX7 Gear AUX6 Gear AUX6 Flap Flap Rudder Rudder

6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap Flap Flap Flap Flap2 Flap2 Rudder2 Rudder2

7 VPP AUX6 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Aileron2 Flap3 Flap3 Flap Flap

8 AUX5 AUX5 VPP AUX5 Flap2 Flap2 Flap4 Flap4 Flap2 Flap2

9 Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator Elevator

10 Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber Camber

11 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Butterfly VPP Butterfly Gear Butterfly Gear Butterfly

12 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 Throttle Motor Throttle Motor

DG1 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW

DG2 SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW SW

CH

FASST 7CHS-FHSSFASSTest 12CHFASSTest 14CH FASST MULT

* Output channels differ by each system of a table. When using a system with few channels, there 

is a wing type which cannot be used. It cannot be used when there is a function required out of 


	
	


CH of each 

The output 

system

CH of each 

The output 

system

Airplane/glider
<Receiver and Servo Installation> 43

● FASSTest12CH 

● FASSTest14CH/FASST MULTI/FASST 7CH/S-FHSS

CH All Other H-4, H4X Swash

1 Aileron Aileron

2 Elevator Elevator

3 Throttle Throttle

4 Rudder Rudder

5 Gyro/RUD Gyro/RUD

6 Pitch Pitch

7 Governor Governor 

8 Needle Elevator2

9 Gyro2/AIL Gyro2/AIL

10 Gyro3/ELE Gyro3/ELE

11 AUX1 AUX1

12 AUX1 AUX1

DG1 SW SW

DG2 SW SW

FASST 7CHS-FHSSFASSTest 14CH FASST MULT

CH All Other H-4, H4X Swash

1 Aileron Aileron

2 Elevator Elevator

3 Throttle Throttle

4 Rudder Elevator2

5 Pitch Pitch

6 Gyro/RUD Gyro/RUD

7 Governor Governor 

8 Governor 2 Rudder

9 Gyro2/AIL Gyro2/AIL

10 Gyro3/ELE Gyro3/ELE

DG1 SW SW

DG2 SW SW

FASSTest 12CH

Helicopter

¦%L!`5




D#500 ̈$#
$`
	

governor is not used.

CH of each 

The output 

system

CH of each 

The output 

system
44 <Model Basic Setting Procedure>

MODEL BASIC SETTING PROCEDURE

1. Model addition and selection

Initially, the T14SG assigns the first model to 

model-01 in the transmitter. The Model Select 

function of the Linkage Menu is used to add 

models and to select amongst models which are 

already set.

The T14SG is capable of storing data for up 

to 30 models in its internal memory. Additional 

model data can also be saved to an optional SD 

card.

The currently selected model name is displayed 

	j	



before changing any settings, always confirm the 

model name.

When a new model is added, the Model type 

select screen and System mode setup screen 

automatically appear. Please be aware that the 

transmitter will stop transmitting temporarily when 

you change the model. 

When a new model is added, you will need to relink the receiver.

2. Model type selection 

Select the model type matched to the aircraft 

with the Model Type select function of the Linkage 

Menu. For an airplane, select the model type from 

among the 2 types: airplane and glider. And then 

select the wing type and the tail type matched to 

the aircraft. 

Airplane/glider basic setting procedure

3. Fuselage linkage

Connect the ailerons, elevators, throttle, rudder, 

etc. in accordance with the model's instruction 

manual. For a description of the connection 

method, see the Receiver and Servos Connection.

 Note that even for the same "airplane 

model", when the wing type and tail type 

are different, the channel assignment may 

be different. (The channel assigned to each 

function can be checked at the Function 

menu of the Linkage Menu.)

 <




4:










)	
0


 %: 
 
 $  


 	
  
 	
4  




!
" 3#!,


	
:!
#$



	
4!$ 




,
#
,


:
!$D
D

	!
!
!



4. Throttle cut setting (Airplane)

Throttle cut can be performed with one touch by a 

switch without changing the throttle trim position.

Set throttle cut with the Throttle Cut function of 

the Linkage Menu. After activating the throttle cut 

function and selecting the switch, adjust the throttle 

position so that the carburetor becomes fully closed. 

For safety, the throttle cut function operates the 
<Model Basic Setting Procedure> 45

throttle stick in the 1/3 or less (slow side) position.

5. Idle down setting (Airplane)

The idling speed can be lowered with one touch 

by a switch without changing the throttle trim 

position. Perform this setting with the Idle Down 

function of the Linkage Menu. After activating the 

Idle Down function and selecting the switch, adjust 

the idle down speed. For safety, the idle down 

function acts only when the throttle stick is in the 

lowest part of its throw.

*While the Throttle Cut function is in operation, the Idle 

Down function does not work.

6. D/R function

D/R function is used to adjust the throw and 

operation curve of the stick functions (aileron, 

elevator, rudder and throttle) for each switch 

#

$
#$

7


	


the maximum throw directions in the End Point 

settings.

(Airplane)

(Glider)

7. Airbrake (Airplane)

This function is used when an airbrake is 

necessary when taking off or diving, etc. Please 

note: this menu item is only available under certain 


8




if a single aileron wing type has been selected.

75


		



be activated by a switch.

The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, and 

flap servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the 

	






be adjusted. You can also set the Auto Mode, which 

will link Airbrake to a stick, switch, or dial. A 

separate stick switch or dial can also be set as the 

ON/OFF switch.

WE			\#"		,
$

The Condition Select function automatically 

allocates the normal condition (NORMAL) for 

each model. NORMAL is the default condition and 

is the only one active when a new model type is 



	



	

to a description of the CONDITION function.

*The NORMAL is always on, and remains on until other 

conditions are activated by switches, stick positions, etc. 

Please refer to the section entitled Switch Selection Method 

for additional information on how to do so.

*It is possible to customize the activation of the flight 

conditions.

*The Condition Delay can be programmed for each channel. 

The Condition Delay is used to change the servo throw 

smoothly when switching conditions.
46 <Model Basic Setting Procedure>

1. Model addition and selection

Initially, the T14SG assigns the first model to 

model-01 in the transmitter. To add new models 

or to select a model already programmed, use the 

Model Select function of the Linkage Menu. 

This is convenient when selecting a model 

after entering the model's names in advance. The 

T14SG is capable of storing up to 30 models in the 

transmitter's internal memory. Additional models 

can also be stored in an optional SD card.

The currently selected model is displayed in 

the middle of the screen. Before flying and before 

changing any settings, always confirm the model 

name. 

When a new model is added, the Model Type select 

screen and system mode setup screen automatically 

appear. Change, or check that they match the swash 

type and receiver type of the model used.

When a new model is added, you will need to relink the receiver.

2. Model type and swash type selection

If a different model type is already selected, 

select helicopter with the Model Type function of 

the Linkage Menu, and then select the swash type 

matched to the helicopter.

*The Model Type function automatically selects the 

appropriate output channels, control functions, and mixing 

Helicopter basic setting procedure

This section outlines examples of use of the helicopter functions of the T14SG. Adjust the actual values, 

etc. to match the fuselage used.

functions for the chosen model type. Six swash types are 

available for helicopters.

*For a description of the swash type selection, refer to the 

MODEL TYPE function.

3. Flight condition addition

7
		nditions 

per model. 

The Condition Select function automatically 



	

 <
	

 0%)

 <+),8
1"73,

 <+),8
-"73,

 <+),8
'"73

 /)+/	


Note: Since you may accidentally activate 

a condition that not previously setup during 

		

		

deleting conditions that are not used.

*For a description of the condition deletion, refer to the 

Condition Select function.

The NORMAL condition is always on, and 

remains on until other conditions are activated by 

switches.

The priority is throttle hold/idle up 3/idle up 2/

idle up 1/normal. Throttle hold has the highest 

priority.

The Condition Delay can be programmed for 

each channel and condition. The Condition Delay 

is used to change the servo throw smoothly when 

switching conditions.

,


	\#"		
#	


$

!&8

	D$






8
!
	
	
	

<
$1&$

"73,



8
4$4
!



<
$-&$

"73,


8


#
&$

"73.


8

<Model Basic Setting Procedure> 47

5. Throttle/Pitch curve setting

This function adjusts the throttle or pitch 

operation curve in relation to the movement of the 

throttle stick for each condition.

7"
	
	
#	




Activate the throttle curve of each condition with 

the condition select switch.

!
:!


! 
 

   
 





 
 
	 # 
  :


	


$
!



	
$

$D





<
$
:!


#
  
 #
 
 

  


!

 $44'+4


#

:!


*>!



$C


C
	

<

		"	
	
#

Activate the pitch curve of each condition with 

the condition select switch.



!

0

$
	$$5!
9o~6o

"

$
	
$


9C$


*Stability at hovering may be connected to the throttle curve. 

Adjustment is easy by using the hovering throttle function 

and hovering pitch function together.



<
$1

#

$1$





!
 
H	

"
3Eo1-o



<
$-

#
	
$
	

$1

#
Bo



/

%4

!5!!$ 


	


?
	

	
5!$
@

#
&3Eo1-o

4. Servo Connection

Connect the throttle rudder, aileron, elevator, 

pitch, and other servos in accordance with the 

kit instruction manual. For a description of the 

connection method, see "Receiver and Servos 

Connection".

 Note: The channel assigned to each function 

can be checked at the Function menu of the 

Linkage Menu.

 < 
 
  $
  
 


 
4 
 
 


  


)	
0
%

%



/31!


%:

$

	

.


 *
 
 
 	
   


 

!




%:

$
	



>


" 3#!

,
#$

	
4

!$ 


,




"$

,5
$/31!


*If any interactions are noticed, for a description of the 

linkage correction function, please refer to the SWASH 

function.
48 <Model Basic Setting Procedure>

function from the Model Menu, and set the curve 

for each condition. (At initial setting, this function 

is in the "INH" state. To use it, set it to the "ON" 

state.)


#	




Activate the mixing curve of each condition with 

the condition select switch.

%

	
5!$
 



8+!5	
!

8
 
 
	 
!  
  
 

!
	
! 

$




8+!5	<
$1

8

4$4:



	
		


	





8+!5	/

#


	
	

	
	
#


$
 
!

Co

9. Throttle hold setting

*If throttle hold is necessary, please refer to the THR HOLD 

function.

10. Throttle cut setting

Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop the 


!

at idle. The action is not functional at high throttle 

to avoid accidental dead sticks. The switch’s 

location and direction must be chosen, as it defaults 

to NULL.

*With throttle stick at idle, adjust the cut position until the 

engine consistently shuts off, but throttle linkage is not 

binding.

**E	!
"		
	

	


	
	

pitch interaction

The swash mix function is used to correct the 

swash plate in the aileron (Left/Right Cyclic) 

and elevator (Forward/Aft Cyclic) direction 

corresponding to each operation of each condition.

6. D/R function

D/R function is used to adjust the throw and 

operation curve of aileron, elevator and rudder for 

each condition.

*For throttle and pitch curve settings, refer to the aforementioned "Throttle/Pitch curve setting"

7


	_+


the maximum throw directions.

SE	,	
	
	
	!"#

The gyro sensitivity and mode switching 

function is utilized to adjust the gyro mixing of the 

model, and can be set for each condition.

 !
	&.


!5!!

 <
 $ 1D<
 $ -D#
 & .


!!!

 /

4	3



$
4!





		


WE	"		()	#	
#

 Note: When using a Futaba GY Gyro, or other 

heading hold gyro, this Pitch to RUD mixing 

should not be used. The reaction torque is 

corrected by the gyro. When operating the 

gyro in the AVCS mode, the mixed signal will 

cause neutral deviation symptoms and the 

gyro will not operate normally.

Use this function when you want to suppress 

the torque generated by the changes in the pitch 

and speed of the main rotor during pitch operation. 

Adjust it so that the nose does not swing in the 

rudder direction. However, when using a heading 

hold gyro like those shown above, do not use Pitch 

to rudder mixing.

Activate the Pitch to rudder (Pit -->RUD) mixing 
<Model Basic Setting Procedure> 49

*ME	7"
	#	
#

*If throttle mixing is necessary for a compensation for 

slowing of engine speed caused by swash plate operation 

during aileron or elevator operation, please refer to the 

THROTTLE MIX function.

*E	'"
	

	#





!5	

#!5	

	

	




		
3!5


:!
%



 



.
!5	

#!5	

	
!5	


	


50 <Functions of System Menu>

SYSTEM MENU

System Menu functions table

[TRAINER]: Starts and sets the trainer system.

[DISPLAY]: LCD and back-light adjustment

[USER NAME]: User name registration

[SOUND]: Turns off the buzzer.

[H/W SET]: H/W reverse, calibration and stick mode

[START SEL.]: Immediately, a model selection can be performed

[AUTO LOCK]: The automatic lock function of two kinds of touch sensors

[INFO]: Displays the program version, SD card information, product ID, and language selection.

[SBUS SERVO]: S.BUS servo setting.

The System Menu sets up functions of the 

transmitter: This does not set up any model data.

 * 
 
! !
  
 

	
"A" 

!




4


"

 ?"A"#,0 0,8@



!




  	 


RTN  HOME/

EXIT $


%

$



<SensorTouchTM>

"







$

 	
# 

"	

0	

RETURN
<Functions of System Menu> 51

TRAINER #

!	
	

T14SG trainer system makes it possible for the 

instructor to chose which channels and operation 

modes that can be used in the students transmitter. 

The function and rate of each channel can be 

set, the training method can also be matched to 

the student's skill level. Two transmitters must be 

connected by an optional Trainer Cord, and the 

Instructors’ transmitter should be programmed for 

trainer operation, as described below.

When the Instructor activates the trainer switch, 

the student has control of the aircraft (if MIX/ 

FUNC/NORM mode is turned on, the Instructor 

can make corrections while the student has control). 

When the switch is released the Instructor regains 

control. This is very useful if the student gets the 

aircraft into an undesirable situation.

"
	

!


"

 
:
0<D8*D

0!


%


 





 


NOTE: This trainer system can be used in the 

following manner;

1. With the T14SG transmitter and a conventional 

transmitter, if the channel order is different, 

it is necessary to match the channel order 

before using this function.

 You can select the channel of input data 

from student's transmitter in the "FUNC" or 

"MIX" mode.

2. When the T14SG is used as the instructor’s 

transmitter, set the modulation mode of the 

student’s transmitter to PPM. 

 If being used as the student, T14SG can be 

connected to the instructor's transmitter which 

the PPM mode as the student's modulation 

mode is required. T14SG always sends PPM 

mode signal from the trainer jack.

3. Be sure that all channels work correctly in 





Corresponding types of transmitters and trainer mode settings:

#$
!
 <6!

	 "
6!

	

"
!#$
 #

	 "
!#$
 #

	 #
*

< "
 0!
 */!
 0!
 */!
 0!


#1;".D#1B0 #1;".D#1B0 %  1;*/D1F*/ %  1;*/D1F*/ -

#1-.8#0;;C9

G*8#0;;19

#
*

#1;".

#1;043;C4

#1-4#1-.4

3'C

%  1-*/ 
*03.'

-;. 1-*/ 

0

#1;". #B.43-C %  1-*/ %""#30)#- - - B*/ %""#308)#

#1;".

#1C*4#G*4

#E*4#F,4

#;,

%  B*/ 

0 - - #1-.8#0;;C9

#1;". #1C*.4#E* %  B*/ %  - - #1-.8#0;;C9

#1;". #B4#F %  B*/ %  - -

#1-.8#0;;C9

G*8#0;;19

#
*

#1;043;C4

#1-4#1-.4

3'C

#1;". %  1-*/ %  1-*/ -

#B.43-C #1;". %  1-*/ %  1-*/ -

#1C*4#1C*.4

#G*4#E*4

#E*4#B

#1;". %  - %  B*/ -
52 <Functions of System Menu>

"


!




"
!

!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

Mode and switch selection

1%
 
 
$ 

 $	
 ; 

 
 	
"1 

!


-0


?%*#@?1-DB*/@


!
# 


$!


'"

 
 !
  	 
 


 #
 $  # 
 #

 	

!
#
!



!
	
4
"1 

 2%*#2&, 
$
 		?@

?@

 21-DB*/2&7




#1;".4

#1;04#1-4#1-.3;C4

?1-*/@





?B*/@

<		

&

;0


?"7@
!


# 


$





 "

2"

!
2



!

!



 2"72&"






 <
	&"/

*The switch mode can also be selected when setting the ON 

position on the switch setup screen. When [ALTERNATE 

OFF] is selected, normal ON/OFF operation is performed. 

When [ALTERNATE ON] is selected, the trainer function 

is alternately turned on and off each time the switch is 

operated. This allows alternate ON/OFF switching even 

when a momentary switch (SH) is used.

"

?#%<,@
"
!!






$

 
 	
#

 

 Note: The trainer function won’t be turned 

on unless the Instructor's transmitter receives 

signals from the student's transmitter. Be 

sure to confirm this after connecting your 

trainer cable.

Operating mode selection

"
$

$	
13'

10


?0+,@
!



	



# 
$!


-"

 
 !
  	 
 


 #
 $  # 
 #

 	

!
#
!



!
	
4
"1 

 20+,2&"




$
!






 NORM: The model is controlled by signals from the student 

transmitter.

 MIX mode: The model is controlled by signals from the 

instructor and student transmitters. (Reset the student's 

model data to the default condition.)

 FUNC mode (function mode): The model is controlled by 

signals from the student transmitter with the instructor 's 

setting. (Reset the student's model data to the default 

condition.)

 OFF: Only the instructor side operates.

Adjusting the student's rate.

*This can be adjusted for students who may need lower rates 

than a more experienced student.

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	

<Functions of System Menu> 53

10


?%#,@
!



	



# 
$!


-%:

 	



 2%#,2&%:





 "
		
&C1CC

 <
&1CC

*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch 

the RTN button for one second.

'#
:!
4
# 



!


Changing the student's channel

*The setting above allows setting of the channel assignment 

of student side when [MIX] or [FUNC] was selected.

10


?"#8*/@
!



	



# 
$!


-"



 	



 #
 $  # 
 #

 	


#
!



!
	
4
"1 

 2"#8*/2&0





<6  
6 !
 #


$ !





!
4
0




	$

$#

 



!
0
$

	
 
	!

54 <Functions of System Menu>

"


!




"
!

!
 	


RTN   .   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

LCD contrast adjustment

1"

2*#%"#2
# 


$!
:


 	



 2*#%"#2& %: 
   




 
 
 	 
 



$

 "
		
&)	
C19+


 <
&9

*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch 

the RTN button for one second.

-#
# 
:!




!


Back-light brightness adjustment

1"

 2<./#,""2   
 #

 
$!


:
 3	 	
 	





 2<./#,""2&%:
 	





 
 
 	 
 



$

 "
		
&41-C)	


 <
&1C

*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch 

the RTN button for one second.

DISPLAY )*+ 3	:!
4
!

LCD contrast, back-light brightness and backlight off-timer adjustment are possible:

Moreover, a display unit can be chosen from the 

metric system or yard/pound. 

-#
# 
:!




!


Back-light off-timer

1"

2#<0,2
# 


$!
:


 3	3!
 	





 2#<0,2&%:
!


 3

	   
 $
	 
 




 "
		
&1C-;C

1C
4



 <
&1C


*When you want to reset the value to the initial state, touch 

the RTN button for one second.

-#
# 
:!




!


Unit system adjustment

1"

28<#"A"2
# 


$!
:


 	



 "
		
&0,#<*A%+D
8+

-#
# 
:!




!


"

?+<"
)%A@

!!





$

 
 	


# 

"	

0	

%:	

<Functions of System Menu> 55

"


!




"
!

!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

USER NAME 8
!

	

This function allows the modelers to change the 

T14SG user name.

*A name of up to 10 characters can be entered as the user 

name. Please note that a space is also counted as one 

character.

User name registration

1*	


!

 
 
&

 ?0	
!

@

 "

?}@?~@4
# 

 ?+

	
@

 7
?+,),#,@



# 


4

!!










 ?%	
@

 7
  
  


 ! 




# 
4

 
  
  
 $

!!





*A name of up to 10 characters long can be entered as the 

user name. (A space is also counted as 1 character.)

-8$!$
	
$4

?,#,@

  
 #  # 
!


$

	
4



?*%*,)@
# 

*
1D'

*
-D'

*
'D'

"

 ?8", %0,@  
 "
! !
 




$

 
 	


# 

8
!



"	

0	
56 <Functions of System Menu>

"


!




"
!

!
 	


RTN   .   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

SOUND #
 


The warning sound and other sounds of the 

T14SG transmitter can be turned off.

*When “WARNING” was set to OFF, the no operation alarm 

(30 minutes), mixing warning sound, and low battery alarm 

sounds also turned off. 

"

?"8+@

!!





$

 
 	


# 

On/off operation

10


?#<0,@?7%<.@

?#/,"8+@
!
#

 
$!


-"


 	





*The display blinks.

'#
# 

"	

0	

"

	!

<Functions of System Menu> 57

"


!




"
!

!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

Operation direction reversal method

1"

?/D7,,",@


$



 
 	
#

 

-0



!
$	


/D7






# 


$!


' "

 
 !
  	 
 


 #
 $  7
 
 #

 
4
$






#
!

!
	
4


"1 

 202&!$



 2,2&$






H/W SETTING /



!


H/W reverse

This function reverses the operation direction of 

the sticks, switches, trimmer levers, and knobs.

Note: This setting reverses the actual operation 

signal, but does not change the display 

indicators. Use the Normal mode as long as 

there is no special reason to use the Reverse 

mode.

Stick mode

This function changes the stick mode of 

transmitter.

Note: This will not change the throttle ratchet, 

etc. Those are mechanical changes that 

must be performed by a Futaba service 

center.

Note: After changing the mode, these changes 

are only applied to new models. It is not 

applied to an existing model.

Stick calibration

J1-J4 stick correction can be performed.

"

?/D7",#@

!!





$

 
 	


# 

Changing stick mode

1"

?"#<*I0+,@


$



 
 	
#

 

-0


2"#<*I0+,2
!


# 


$!


'"


!
#
$ 7



# 
4
!


	
#
!

!
	
4


"1 

(J1)

(J2)

(J4)

(J3)

0
 1 - ' ;

1 %
 #
 ,
 


- %
 ,
 #
 


' 
 #
 ,
 %


; 
 ,
 #
 %


%

$



"	

0	
58 <Functions of System Menu>

Stick calibration method

*J3 and J4 correction is described below. J1 and J2 

corrections are performed using the same procedure. 

1"

?*%)<%#<@


$



 
 	
#

 

-0
 
   
 '3;  


# 

'0

';

$

$

# 



;"

';
 !

	
 


9"

';
$



 


F#
  
 !$

 
 


$
 $

  
  


$
!
!
<Functions of System Menu> 59

"


!




"
!

!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

Setting Up and Adjusting the Quick Select Models

1#
 " "

 "#%# ",) !
 



	
#1;"."
!0


#
!

$



"A" "
!   !
  8
 


"
#		
""



"#%#",)
$


#

 >!




-#
""

"#%#",)!
$


!
	"



 0
 "

 
  $$ 
  #



"

0
"

4


 
 "
#    
 


	


!	
7


		
4$




# 

"
#


	!	
$7


"

8<*I",)
4$




# 
	!










Quick Select Activation:

With the Quick Select (QUICK SEL.) option 

activated, there are two additional options available 

for customization; ALWAYS and MDL (Model). 

These options determine if/when the Quick Select 

information will appear on-screen. ALWAYS, 

as the name suggests, indicates that each time 

the transmitter is powered-up, the Quick Select 

information will appear on-screen. The MDL 

(Model) setting indicates that the Quick Select 

information will appear on-screen only when 

the MDL button is pressed simultaneously as the 

transmitter is turned ON. With the Quick Select 

mode highlighted, use the SensorTouch to move to 

the activation setting options. Model (MDL) is the 

default setting. Press the Return (RTN) button to 

bring forth the options, then scroll to the ALWAYS 

setting using the SensorTouch pad. Press the Return 

#\7E$


Y

START SEL is a function which starts and can 

perform a model selection immediately. 

Each time, it is convenient for the modeler 

which is enjoying two or more models by one of a 

transmitter.

Quick Select Screen

As the name suggests, the Quick Model Select 

Function enables the modeler to change the 

selected models rapidly each time the transmitter is 

turned ON. With a few quick touches, it is possible 

to change models whereas before it would require 

a multi-step process. The T14SG stores up to four 

models in the Quick Select offerings.

Model Select Screen

When the transmitter is turned on, it will open to 

the Model Selection Screen immediately. 

START SEL. <!!

4!


 
$
!

60 <Functions of System Menu>

Assigning models to the sensor buttons: 

There are four sensors/buttons that correspond 

with the SensorTouch: Link (LNK), Model (MDL) 

System (SYS) and S1. As such, it is possible to offer 

up to four models available through the Quick Select 

	<




most often. 

18
 
 "
#4   
 




D 
>!
(
5!$
4

))I

-7 
 $ 
5  
 

 


		
4$


# 


!


'8	 
 "
#4  	 


 
 !
  # 

 
 



!
4$


# 

;
$




!	


Using the sensors to select the model:

1#  
 !
4 	 


 "

 

  < 0
 0+) 

 




4$

 

$



0
0+)

$
	$


!


* Please note: Even if the Quick Select function is active, the 

Power Mode screen will appear when the transmitter is turned 

ON while simultaneously pressing the Return (RTN) button.

-#


!
	
$


4 
3






5!$
40+,)3C'	
"14 
3

"1 	
	4
0


3C'#
#1;".
 


>!



!
!
!

	
	

* If the Return (RTN) button is double-clicked, the T14SG the 

current model is selected as indicated on the display. That is, 

the model that was used prior to the last time the transmitter 

was turned OFF. 

Model Select Screen

This allows the Model Select screen to be accessed 

immediately upon turning ON the transmitter. 

* Please note: this function cannot be utilized at the same time 

as the Quick Select function. If more than four models are 




[%	

utilized as it will save time when selecting the desired aircraft. 

			
"!%

would be the best choice.

* Please note: the Model Select function does not allow access 

to the RENAME, COPY or DELETE options. To utilize one 

of these options, please access the Model Select screen in 

the typical manner as described in the complete instruction 

manual.

1#
 " "

 "#%# ",) !
 



	
#1;". "
!0


#
!

$



"A" "
!   !
  8
 


"
#		
""



"#%#",)
$


#

 >!




-#
""

"#%#",)!
$


!
	"



 0
 "

 
  $$ 
  #



"

0
"

4



"
#

	




!	
7


		
4$


# 



"
#
	


0
"

0+,)",)





# 
	


0
"




Model Select Activation:

With the Model Select (MODEL SEL.) option 

activated, there are two additional options available 

for customization; ALWAYS and MDL (Model). 

These options determine if/when the Model Select 

information will appear on-screen. ALWAYS, 

as the name suggests, indicates that each time 

the transmitter is powered-up, the Model Select 

information will appear on-screen. The MDL 

(Model) setting indicates that the Model Select 

information will appear on-screen only when 

the MDL button is pressed simultaneously as the 

transmitter is turned ON.

With the Model Select mode highlighted, use the 
<Functions of System Menu> 61

SensorTouch to move to the activation setting 

options. Model (MDL) is the default setting. Press 

the Return (RTN) button to bring forth the options, 

then scroll to the ALWAYS setting using the 

SensorTouch pad. Press the Return (RTN) button 




Y

Using the Model Select Function:

1#  
 !
4 	 


0
 "

 

  < 0
 0+) 

 




4$

 

$



0
0+)

$
	$


!


*Please note: Even if the Model Select function is active, the 

Power Mode screen will appear when the transmitter is turned 

ON while simultaneously pressing the Return (RTN) button.

-#
"
#


!	


 3

 !
 #
 
 !


! 
		




!

<

!




4

"
#	


  
 $( 
 		


	  %	4  

  !
4

$


# 	

#
 #1;". 
   
  

>!



!
!
!

	

62 <Functions of System Menu>

"


!




"
!

!
 	


RTN   .   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

● Lock release

Every lock function's touch [ 1 second 

or more ] of S1 button will release the 

lock.

● Lock release

Every lock function's touch [ 1 second 

or more ] of HOME/EXIT button will 

release the lock.

● Manual lock

If S1 button is touched 1 second 

or more from a HOME screen, a 

SensorTouch locks manually.

● Manual lock

If HOME/EXIT button is touched 1 

second or more from a HOME screen, 

a SensorTouch locks manually.

● Display of a lock

If locked, there will be sound and the 

icon of a key will come out.

Auto lock method

1$
 
 %  

  
 
!

!


- %: 
  !
  
 %

)#
!
 
		

!!



/0,




#
!
: 





!
 $  'C 
  < 
 !



4$$ 


'#
 " ) 
	 4  
 
4

!  
 #1;". 
 


!
$

$#



!
64$



"1




*If neither the Lock Timer or Start Lock functions are active 

(OFF), then the key lock remains even if the power is turned off.

*If the Lock Timer is enabled and the Start Lock is off, the key 

lock status is canceled each time the T14SG is turned on.

The Auto Lock function makes it possible to lock 

the transmitter to prevent any unwanted input from 






 The auto lock function can be set in two ways.

LOCK TIMER

Auto Lock functions automatically when there is 

no operation from the HOME screen display for a 

chosen number of seconds.

START LOCK

Auto Lock functions automatically when the 

model changes or power is turned on.

*To temporarily allow access to the T14SG programming 

press and hold the S1 or HOME/EXIT bitton for one second. 

Please note, the Auto Lock function timer will resume 

immediately once again.

AUTO LOCK #
!"
#

Danger

It is recommended to Lock the 

%7

any accidental touches which could 

change settings and cause an accident. 
<Functions of System Menu> 63

"


!




"
!

!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

INFO +$
$	!
4"+!4$<+

The T14SG system program version information, 

SD card information (current and maximum 

	


$


ID are displayed on the Information screen.

*When the SD card is not inserted, the SD card information is 

not displayed.

The language displayed in home, menu, and 

setup screen is selectable.

"

?<@

!!





$

 
 	
#

 

Information

 2
+8*#2&
<+! 


 2<+2&<+! 


 2)%.8%.,2&#
		

#1;".

2,"<2".
!$	!


!

 2%,%2&%

#1;".

 2*%+"<,2&*
D05!!! 


!

>
"+

Language selection

10


2)%.8%.,2
!


# 


$!


-*	

		
 	



 #
 $  7
 
 #

 
4
		
	


#
!

	
4
,+<#

$
"1 

"	

0	

"

	!

64 <Functions of System Menu>

"


!




"
!

!
 	


RTN   .   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

"8"

	

An S.BUS servo can memorize the channel 

and various settings you input. Servo setting 

can be performed on the T14SG screen by 

wiring the servo as shown in the figure.

"

?"8+@

!!





$

 
 	


# 

"	

0	

"

	!


Servo ID number

Individual ID numbers are memorized for your 

S.BUS(2) servos in your T14SG. When a servo is 

used, the servo ID number is automatically read by 

the transmitter. If you use multiple S.BUS(2) servos 

and do not want to change the settings on all that are 

mounted in a fuselage, only the desired servo in the 


'	


servo.

* S9070SB cannot be arranged by T14SG. 

* With some S.BUS(2) servos, there are some functions with 

cannot be used. If a function cannot be used, the display screen 

will change. 

(Only the function which can be used by a servo is displayed.)

* After reading completion, with connection of the above 

	
!	
	

can be operated and carried out.

Procedure for changing S.BUS servo setting

1"

?"8"",@
"
!0


-7



>	
 


'

?,*%))@$	
'"1$



#
<+

	



$
?,*%))@
 ⇒ # 

$
 ⇒ #$
1


;7
!$




	


?</@
	

<+! 





?%*#@


<+






9"


!






5$	


F   
  
    ? 7  < # , @     $  	 
  '  ? 7  < # , @   


 ⇒ #$
 ⇒ #$
1


#

	
	



 ?<<#@4    
  
 


$
?<<#@
 ⇒ #

$
 ⇒ #$
1


"8"D"8"-

"





#1;".

'3 



A3



SBUS SERVO
<Functions of System Menu> 65

S.BUS Servo Description of function of each parameter

*There are a function which can be used according to the kind of servo, and an impossible function. 



Displays the ID of the servo whose parameters are to be read. It cannot be changed.

	



Channel of the S.BUS system assigned to the servo. Always assign a channel before use.




The direction in which the servo rotates can be changed.



When “Retractable” is selected and the servo has been continuously stopped for 30 seconds, the dead band 

expands and unnecessary hold current due to external force is eliminated. When a new control signal enters, 

normal operation is resumed. When using the servo as a landing gear servo, select “Retractable”. Also adjust the 

servo travel to match the landing gear movement range.

	

Restricts operation in the specified direction the instant the power is turned on. By using this setting, the first initial 

movement when the power is turned on slowly moves the servo to the specified position.



The state of the servo when the servo input signal is lost can be specified. The "Hold" mode setting holds the 

servo in its last commanded position even if using AM or FM system.



This function changes smoothness of the servo operation relative to stick movement changes. Smooth setting is 

used for normal flight. Select the "OFF" mode when quick operation is necessary such as 3D.

	

The neutral position can be changed. When the neutral offset is large value, the servo's range of travel is restricted 

on one side.




Speeds can be matched by specifying the operating speed. The speed of multiple servos can be matched without 

being affected by motor fluctuations. This is effective for load torques below the maximum torque.

However, note that the maximum speed will not be exceed what the servo is capable of even if the servos 

operating voltage is increased. 

		


The dead band angle at stopping can be specified.

[Relationship between dead band set value and servo operation]

Small ° Dead band angle is small and the servo is immediately operated by a small signal change.

Large ° Dead band angle is large and the servo does not operate at small signal changes.

(Note) If the dead band angle is too small, the servo will operate continuously and the current consumption will 

increase and the life of the servo will be shortened.

	!

The left and right travels centered about the neutral position can be set independently.

"

The minimum current applied to the internal motor when starting the servo can be set. Since a small travel does 

not start the motor, it essentially feels like the dead band was expanded. The motor can be immediately started by 

adjusting the minimum current which can start the motor.

[Relationship between boost set value and servo operation]

Small ° Motor reacts to a minute current and operation becomes smooth.

Large ° Initial response improves and output torque increases. However, if the torque is too large, operation will 

become rough.
66 <Functions of System Menu>

"#$$

OFF : It is the boost ON at the time of low-speed operation.(In the case of usual)

ON : It is always the boost ON.(When quick operation is hope)

	

The characteristic when the servo is stopped can be set.

When smaller than the standard value, the characteristic becomes an overshoot characteristic. If the value is 

larger than the standard value, the brake is applied before the stop position.

Especially, when a large load is applied, overshoot, etc. are suppressed by inertia and hunting may occur, 

depending on the conditions. If hunting (phenomena which cause the servo to oscillate) occurs even though the 

Dead Band, Stretcher, Boost and other parameters are suitable, adjust this parameter to a value larger than the 

initial value.

[Relationship between damper set value and servo operation]

Small ° When you want to overshoot. Set so that hunting does not occur.

Large ° When you want to operate so that braking is not applied. However, it will feel like the servo response has 

worsened.

(Note) If used in the hunting state, not only will the current consumption increase, but the life of the servo will also 

be shortened.

%

The servo hold characteristic can be set. The torque which attempts to return the servo to the target position 

when the current servo position has deviated from the target position can be adjusted.

This is used when stopping hunting, etc., but the holding characteristic changes as shown below.

[Relationship between stretcher and servo operation]

Small ° Servo holding force becomes weaker.

Large ° Servo holding force becomes stronger.

(Note) When this parameter is large, the current consumption increases.

"&&

When the power supply of a servo is previously turned on at the time of a power supply injection without taking 

transmit of a transmitter, the buzzer sound of about 2.5 Hz continues sounding from a servo. 

(Even when the transmit of a transmitter is taken out previously, a buzzer becomes until the signal of a servo is 

outputted normally, but it is not unusual.) 

The transmitter has been turned OFF ahead of a servo power supply → The buzzer sound of about 1.25 Hz 

continues sounding as servo power supply end failure alarm.

(Do not insert or remove the servo connector while the receiver power is ON. A buzzer may sound 

by incorrect recognition.) 

* Buzzer sound is generated by vibrating the motor of a servo. 

Since current is consumed and a servo generates heat, please do not operate the number more than needed or 

do not continue sounding a buzzer for a long time. 
<Functions of Linkage Menu> 67

FUNCTIONS OF LINKAGE MENU

The Linkage Menu is made up of functions 

which perform model addition, model type 

selection, system type, end point setting, and other 

model basic settings.

The functions which can be selected depend on 

the model type. A typical menu screen is shown 

below.

*The display screen is an example. The 

screen depends on the model type.

Linkage Menu functions table

[SERVO]: Displays the servo test and operation position

[MODEL SEL]: Model addition, call, deletion, copy, model name setting

[MODEL TYPE]: Model type, wing type, swash type, etc. selection

[SYSTEM]: System mode selection, link of a transmitter and receiver, area mode selection

[FUNCTION]: Channel assignment of each function can be changed

[SUB-TRIM]: Adjusts the neutral position of each servo

[REVERSE]: Reverses the servo travel direction

[FAIL SAFE]: Fail safe function and battery fail safe function setting

[END POINT]: Servo travel adjustment and limit setting

[SERVO SPEED]: Speed setup of a servo

[THR CUT]: Stops the engine safely and easily (airplane and helicopter only)

[IDLE DOWN]: Lowers the idle speed of the engine (airplane only)

¤%<%\E3¥)J



8
#
$

[SWASH]: Swash AFR and linkage correction function (helicopter only)

[T1-T4 SET.]: Control step amount and mode selection of the digital trim

[WARNING]: Mixing warning normal reset 

[TELEMETRY]: Displays various data sent from the receiver.

[SENSOR]: Various telemetry sensors setting

[DATA RESET]: Model memory set data reset

%

)	
!
 
 

$$	
)I !


"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN  HOME/

EXIT $


<SensorTouchTM>

*

"







$

 	
# 

*	
$



"	

0	

RETURN
68 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

SERVO MONITOR "
#
¡.$+$D+$
$

This is used for testing servo movement. 

“Moving Test” (repetition mode) and “Neutral 

7#8$





 The “Neutral Test” is good for finding the 

neutral position of a servo horn.

In order to prevent any potential difficulties, 

the servo test function will be inoperable, or 



%



the Servo Test function is not operational if the 

Throttle Cut is ON in either airplane or helicopter 

modes; or if the Throttle Hold is ON in Helicopter 

mode.

"

?",@
)	
!





$

 
 	


# 

%?80,8D0@ $

!

!




Servo test operation

10


?@
!


# 
$

!


 "



!
 	




# #
$

 #
# 	



!
#
!
!
	
4


"1 

 ?0<.@&0

$
$






 ?,8#%)@&0






$

- 0
 
   
 ?0<.@ 

?,8#%)@
!
# 


$!


 "


?@ 	




# #
	$$


"	

0	

"

	!

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 69

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

MODEL SELECT #
0
"

$
!!
4

4



4$4!
!

	

This function is used to load the settings of the 

desired model into the T14SG’s memory.

The settings may be selected from either the 

transmitter’s internal memory or an SD card. 

Remember that up to 30 model memories are available 

in the transmitter.

The name of the model stored in the transmitter and 

the SD card may be changed. This can be very useful 

to tell different models settings apart. Each model name 

can be as long as 10 characters, and the model name 

always appears in the display screen.

The Copy function is used to copy parameters, 

settings, etc. from one model data into a second 

memory. It may be used for getting a head-start on 

setting up models with almost the same settings (only 

		
	

complete model from scratch). Also, this function may 

be used to make a backup copy of a model setup before 

any changes are made.

*T14SG can use the model data of T8FGS for SD card, 

copying it. However, the model data of T14SG cannot be 

used by T8SG (S).

Model selection

*Model data saved on the transmitter memory other than the 

model currently used can be selected.

1 0
 
   
 
 


$2#22*%+2
#

 
$!


 "




 	




# 

 ?#@&#!
!
!

 ?*%+@&"+

-%
!	



!



!
4
# 

'0
?",),*#@

;# 
 #  % !

!
	
$
#
# 





!$



*Transmission stops and then starts in the new model.

Model addition

*A new model can be added to the transmitter memory. It can 

not be added to the SD card.

10

?,7@

-# 
 #  % !

!
	
$$
#
# 





*The model type setup screen and frequency setup screen are 







&



and SYSTEM mode.

*Transmission stops and then starts in the new model.

*The added model appears in the model list of the model 

select setup screen.

*Link is required when a new model is 

made from a model selection.

 "

 ?0+,) ",),*#@  
 )	
 !





$

 
 

	
# 

*The display screen is an example. The 

screen depends on the model type.

"	

0	

"

	!


0


*
!

70 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

Model deletion

*The model stored in the transmitter memory or an SD card 

can be deleted.

*The current model can not be deleted.

1 0
 
   
 
 


$2#22*%+2
#

 
$!


 "




 	




# 

 ?#@&#!
!
!

 ?*%+@&"+

-0


!






!




# 

'0

?+,),#,@

;#
# 7
>!

!
	
$

# 

 
  
 
4 
 !
 






Model name change

*The model name of the model stored in the transmitter 

memory or a SD card can be changed.

1<		
&

 0
 
   
 
 


$2#22*%+2
#

 
$!


 "




 	




# 

 ?#@&#!
!
!

 ?*%+@&"+

-0


!


	

!




# 

'0
?,%0,@

;#
# 

*The model name setup screen is displayed.

 User name (candidate)

9 *	
 
 !
 !
  
 


 
&

 ?0	

!

@

 "

?}@?~@4
# 

 ?+

	
@

 7
?+,),#,@



# 


4

!!










 ?%	
@

 7
  
  


 ! 




# 
4

 
  
  
 $

!!





*A name of up to 10 characters long can be entered as the 

model name. (A space is also counted as one character.)

F%



! 

$4



?,#,@
# 

#
!
$

	


4

?*%*,)@
#

 

Model copy

*A copy can be made of the model stored in the transmitter 

memory or an SD card.

1<		
&

 0
 
   
 
 


$2#22*%+2
#

 
$!


 "




 	




# 

 ?#@&#!
!
!

 ?*%+@&"+

-"


!
$


!


# 

'0
?*
A@

;#
# 

*The copy screen appears.

9< 
$	 
 !
 
  


!
!
!&

 0
?%++3)<"#@
# 


$!


 "



!
 	




# 

 ?%++3)<"#@&	
!



 ?!
!
@&
$	
!


*The model stored in the SD card can be replaced.

 <		
&

 0
 
   
 $ 


$2#22*%+2
#

 
$!


 "




 	




# 

F0
?*
A@

E#
# 7
>!

!
	
$

# 




4
!


$

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 71

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

MODEL TYPE #


!
$
!!	$
4
$
4

	


(The display screen is an example. The 

screen depends on the model type.)

 Six swash types are available for helicopters. 

Six types of main wings and three types of tail 

wings are available for airplanes and gliders. 

Functions and mixing functions necessary for each 

model type are set in advance at the factory.

Note: The Model Type function automatically 

selects the appropriate output channels, 

control functions, and mixing functions for the 

chosen model type.

 When the Model Type selection command 

is accessed, all of the data in the active 

memory is cleared (except the following 

swash type.) Be sure that you don’t mind 

losing this data, or back it up to another 

memory using the copying functions.

 When changing the helicopter swash type 

within the following groups, you can leave 

the settings other than the SWASH function. 

However, this is initialized when you change 

the swash type to the other swash type 

group.

Model type selection

10



!

	

# 


$!


 "

 
 

 $
  	 




# %

!!
	
$$
#


# 



 0
?A,"@#
# 





 #
!
$

	


4
"1 

?@


# 

 2#A
,2&0
$


 27<.2$
D	
&7	$


 2#%<)2$
D	
&#$


 2"7%"/2
$
&"$


*The wing types which can be selected depend on the mode; 

FASST, Multi-ch, or 7ch, etc.

"

?0+,)#A
,@
)	
!





$

 
 	


# 

- < 

	 
  
 		 



$
$
&

(Helicopter)

 0

?@
#

 
$!


 "

 ?@  	 
  



# %!

!
	
$$
#
# 

 %

$

	#



	$!






Swash type group A:

/314/3'4/'4/,'

Swash type group B:

/3;4/3;

"	

0	

"

	!

72 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

Model type selection (Airplane, Glider)

Q#	
	F
$

Q#	
	7

	!#$

(
	


7
	


Model type selection (Helicopter)

!
"	

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 73

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

System Type selection

The T14SG is for 2.4GHz only. The system 

can be changed from among 5 choices: FASSTest 

14CH, FASSTest 12CH, FASST MULTI, 

FASST 7CH, S-FHSS. It is FASSTest14CH and 

FASSTest12CH which can be chosen by R7008SB 

set. The method of selection is to the next page.

*If you change the System Type, other model data is not 

reset.

*If a system type is changed in Helicopter mode, the 

transmitter will offer two selections:

[Yes] : Selection sets the channel order suitable for System 

Type. (We recommend here. )

[No] : The present channel order is maintained.

*After any change, remember to test the model and should 

fully check servo direction and a motion.

*Analog servos cannot be used with the R7008SB in the 

SYSTEM "
!!

	4




Area mode selection (Frequency range)

The T14SG transmitter has been designed to 

function in many countries. If you will be utilizing 

this transmitter in a country other than France, 

please make sure that [AREA] is set to "G". If, 

however, this transmitter will be utilized in France, 

it must be set to "F" in order to comply with French 

regulations.FASST mode selection

Receiver linking

The receiver will only be controlled (without 

being affected by other transmitters) by the 

transmitter it is linked to. When using a receiver 

other than one purchased as a set, linking is 

necessary.

Moreover, a re-link is required when a new 

model is added by model selection, and the time of 

system type change.

FASSTest 12CH mode.

Dual receiver function (only FASSTest 14CH 

mode)

Dual receivers can be linked with the T14SG. 

Two receivers are recognized individually by ID 

numbers. For example, in R7008SB, CH output 

setting function is used, by setting the first as as 

"1-8CH", and setting the second as "9-14CH", two 

sets of receivers can be used as a set in the model, 

allowing you 14 channels. If a Dual receiver 

function is used, the following function can set up 

individually.

・Battery fail-safe voltage setup 

・Telemetry function ON/OFF

・Sensor setup

Battery fail-safe voltage setup (only FASSTest 

mode)

The voltage which battery fail-safe activates, 

can be set when you link. (3.5-8.4V) The receiver 

memorizes the setting as it was at link.

Suggested setting voltages are as follows.

0E&E[#E
)0L$±@L

DJ#E
)KK$±KBKD

DJ+#E
)`0$±`D`0

It is a rough reference value.

Since it changes with servos carried in the 

condition and the model of a battery, please set to 

your own model in a battery consumption current.

"

?"A"#,0@
)	
!





$

 
 	


# 

"	

0	

"

	!


Linking method P.37

Cases when linking is necessary:

・7
	





	

・7

!!
!	


%""#
1;*/ ↔ %""#
1-*/
)

・7
  
 !
  

  !





74 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

Telemetry function (FASSTest mode only)

To use the telemetry function, set “Telemetry” 

to “ACT”.

DL Interval (FASSTest mode only)

When a telemetry function is enabled, the 

receiving interval (down-link interval) of sensor 

data can be changed. 

If a DL interval is increased, the response of 

the sensor data display becomes slower, but stick 

response will improve. 

System Type selection procedure

10
 
   
 ?%""#
31;*/@


!
# 


$!


-"

 
 
! $
  	 





 ?%""#
31;*/@?%""#
31-*/@?%""#3

08)#@?%""#3E*/@?"3/""@

*An example of selections for each system is on the 

following page.

'#
# 
:!




!


Dual receiver function (only FASSTest 14CH 

mode) procedure

10


?"<.),@
!


# 


$!


-"


?"<.),@?+8%)@ 	





'#
# 
:!




!


Area mode selection (Frequency range)

procedure

10


?.@
!


# 
$

!


-"


?.@?@ 	





*"F" is chosen only when using the transmitter is used in 

France. Leave this in "G" otherwise.

'#
# 
:!




!


Telemetry ACT/INH procedure

10


#,),0,#A?%*#@
!


# 


$!


-"


?%*#@?</@ 	





'#
# 
:!




!


DL Interval set procedure

10


#,),0,#A+)?1C@


!
# 


$!


-"


+)!
 	



 <  +) 
  

4 



$


$ 
!



4 
$
!$


 <
&1C

 %:!
	
&C1-C

'#
# 
:!




!


<+   
!




$

<+"





$

<+8%)4$!


$



54




<Functions of Linkage Menu> 75

System Type

■ FASSTest 14CH ---

■ FASSTest 12CH ---

■ FASST MULTI ---

■ FASST 7CH --- FASST-7CH system receiver mode. Up to 7 channels can be used.

■ S-FHSS --- S-FHSS system receiver mode. Up to 8 channels can be used.

FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with the telemetry sensor unit. Up to 

18 channels (linear 12+ON/OFF2) can be used.

FASSTest system receiver mode. Applicable with receiver voltage display. Up to 12 

channels (linear10+ON/OFF2) can be used. Telemetry Sensor cannot be used, but 

the response speed is a faster than that of the 14CH mode.

FASST-MULTI system receiver mode. Up to 14 channels (linear 12+ON/OFF2) can 

be used.

s!NALOGSERVOSCANNOTBEUSEDWITHTHE23"INTHE&!334EST#(MODE

-Response speed has 

priority over number 

of channels

-Telemetry requires 

only the current 

receiver battery

-Want to use a 

previously used 

receiver as is

-Want to use a 

miniature receiver 

for indoor planes

-Want to use an 

S-FHSS system 

miniature receiver

FASSTest 14CH

FASSTest 12CH

FASST MULTI

FASST 7CH

S-FHSS

R608FS

R6008HS

R6108SB

R6208SB

R6014HS

R6014FS

R6203SB

R6203SBE

R6202SBW

R6303SB

R6303SBE

R7008SB

R7003SB

R617FS

R6004FF

R616FFM

R6106HF

R6106HFC

R6203SB

R6203SBE

R6202SBW

R6303SB

R6303SBE

R2006GS

R2106GF

R2008SB

R7008SB

R7003SB

(Usable receivers)

-Want to use more channels

-Want to use a large number 

of telemetry functions

(The time of December, 2012) 

The example for choosing System Type
76 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

FUNCTION *
	!

 
	


When you select model and wing (swash) types, 

you will find that the optimized combinations of 

servo output channels and functions have been 

already preset. If you would like, you can freely 

change combinations of servo output channels, 

functions (aileron, elevator, etc), and control (sticks, 

switches, and trim levers). 

*You can also assign the same function to multiple servo 

output channels such as assigning elevator function to CH2 

and CH3.

Channel Replacement

When the channel is replaced in the Function 

menu, replaced channel uses the setting data (ATV, 

SUB-TRIM, REVERSE, F/S, and B-F/S, etc.).

Servo Output Channels

For FASSTest 14CH mode, you can set 12 linear 

channels and two digital channels. For FASSTest 

12CH mode, you can set 10 linear channels and 

two digital channels. For FASST MULT mode, you 

can set 12 linear channels and two digital channels.

Function change

10



!



	



# 

*The function selection screen is displayed.

-0


!




# 

*The function name blinks.

' # 
 #   
5

 


	
 7
    
 

$
4
"1 

*Multiple channels can be assigned to one function.

For FASST 7CH mode, you can set only 7 linear 

channels. For S-FHSS mode, you can set only 8 

linear channels.

*DG1/2 (digital channels)

 These channels can function as switched channels. You can 

freely change combinations between servo output channels 

and input controls (sticks, switches, and trim levers).

Motor Function

If you have either a Glider or Airplane Model 

Type selected, and choose to activate the Motor 

function, a reverse setting screen is displayed. 

*If YES is selected, the output is reversed. If NO is selected, 

the output is normal.

Q
#

 As a safety precaution to prevent the motor 

from starting unexpectedly, please switch 

off the motor accordingly. We also suggest 

removing the propeller from the motor as an 

additional precaution.

Operation control change

10


2*#)2
!



	



# 

*The control selection screen is displayed.

-0




	
4
# 

*The same control can be assigned to multiple channels.

(The display screen is an example. The 

screen depends on the model type.)

 "

 ?8*#<@  
 )	
 !
 




$

 
 	


# 

#!$
!


2*02&*! !


2",
%2&"
$
!


<
$ T1-T4 SET)<I%.,0,8

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 77

2

@@%
\		
#	#
$

&
6[6j
	

	

each condition.

 *! 
40
	$D

	

	$
!




$

  

2.2&.$!!

2"2&"	




Trim setting

 0


2#<02
!



	



# 

*The trim setup screen is displayed.

 #
	
! 


!


$

&

Trim selection

 0


!4

4




# 

*The setting can be changed.

Trim rate setting

 0
 
   
 ?%#,@ 
! 


# 


$!


 "

!
 	



 <
&'C

 %:!
	
&319C19C

(When the RTN button is touched for one second, the trim 

rate is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 
:!




!


Trim mode selection

 0


?0+,@
!


# 


$!


 "


!!
 	



%!!
	
$$


#
# 	

!


#
!
$

	


4
"1 

 ?0@&!!
!!$


!$


 ?%#)@& %#) $
 !
 05!!

	
 
 
  3 $4

! 
  
 ! <  

$ 







 *[NORMAL]/[REVERSE] selection is possible in "ATL" 

mode. 

Throttle trim (helicopter only)

* The throttle trim in conditions other than "Normal" 

condition can be inhibited.

 7
 
  !  




4!


!



$


#

 1


*When "X" is displayed, THR trim is inhibited in conditions 

other than normal condition.

Channel replacement

 0



¢

 
$
   
 #  


$!


 "




¢ 	



%!!
	


$$
#
# 
$




#
!
$



	
4
"1 
78 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

SUB-TRIM "
	
$



(The display screen is an example. The 

screen depends on the model type.)

The Sub-Trim function is used to set the servo 

neutral position, and may be used to make fine 

adjustments to the control surface after linkages 

and pushrods are hooked up. When you begin to set 

up a model, be sure that the digital trims are set to 

their center position.

Sub-trim adjustment

10





:
# 


$!


-%:

 	



 <
&C

 %:!
	
&3-;C-;C
$

(When the RTN button is touched for one second, sub-trim is 

reset to the initial value.)

*Before sub-trim adjustment, it is very important to adjust the 

linkages at the control surface so that you do not use subtrim, except for very minute adjustments.

'#
# 
:!




!


;
$
$





"

?"83#<0@
)	
!





$

 
 	


# 

"	

0	

%:	

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 79

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

REVERSE 8







Servo Reverse changes the direction of an 

individual servo’s response to a control input.

For CCPM helicopters, be sure to read the 

section on Swash AFR before reversing any servos. 

With CCPM helicopters, always complete your 

servo reversing prior to any other programming. 

If you use pre-built Airplane/Sailplane functions 

that control multiple servos, it may be confusing 

Servo reversing procedure

*Upon setup completion of a new model, check whether or 

not each servo is connected to the correct channel.

*Next, determine whether you need to reverse any channels 

by moving each stick and/or other control inputs.

10









# 


$!


-"



 	



%>!!
	
$$


 ?0@&!

 ?,@&




'# 
 #   	
 



#
!
$



	
4
"1 

*Repeat the operation above for each channel that must be 

reversed.

to tell whether the servo needs to be reversed or a 

setting in the function needs to be reversed. See the 

instructions for each specialized function for further 

details. Always check servo direction prior to every 








model memory, hook ups, and radio function.

(The display screen is an example. The 

screen depends on the model type.)

"

?,,",@
)	
!





$

 
 	


# 

"	

0	

"

	!

80 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

FAIL SAFE "


$
	$
!
	

	
 








 
	
$

(The display screen is an example. The 

screen depends on the model type.)

The Failsafe function may be used to set up 

positions that the servos move to in the case of 

radio interference.

You may set either of two positions for each 

channel: Hold, where the servo maintains its last 

commanded position, or Failsafe, where each 

servo moves to a predetermined position. You may 

choose either mode for each channel. (FASST 7CH 

mode: CH3 only)

The T14SG system also provides you with an 

advanced battery monitoring function that warns 

you when the receiver battery has only a little 

power remaining. In this case, each servo is moved 

to the defined failsafe position. (FASST 7CH 

mode: CH3 only) The battery failsafe may be 

released by operating a predefined control on the 

transmitter (default is throttle), do not continue 

to fly, land as soon as possible. Remember, if the 

Fail safe setting procedure

1 0
 
   
 2D"2 
!  





#

 
$!


-"


D"!
 	



%>!!
	
$$


*The display blinks.

'#
# #
"1 

$
	

*The channel switches to the F/S mode.

;0


2
"2
!

 /

$	4 4
4


  
 $   
 


!






#
# 





*The set position is displayed in percentage.

*If you want to return that channel to the hold mode, move 

the cursor to the "F/S" item and touch the RTN button 

to switch to the data input mode. Select the F/S mode by 







and then change the mode by touching the RTN button.

predefined control suddenly moves to a position 

you did not command, land at once and check your 

receiver battery.

'




when receiver battery voltage becomes low.

Q
#

 For safety, always set the fail safe functions.

¦\
	

		


the servo moves to the maximum slow side for airplanes and 

to the slow side from the hovering position for helicopters.

Crashing of the model at full high when normal radio waves 

cannot be received due to interference, etc., is very dangerous.

¦	

	

	!



be mistaken for an engine malfunction and will be reset at 



	



any doubts, immediately land.

Battery fail safe setting procedure

 

 





 
!
!



	

$

"



2D"2
!

 ?@&



 ?@&



Battery fail safe release switch setting

 #
!$



 


 
 4  
 
	
 





 



 
   $  
 




 
	
#
	








 



10


?,),%",D"@
!



$

$	


-#
# 

*The switch selection screen is called.

*For a detailed description of the switch selection and ON/

OFF direction setting method, see [Switch Setting Method] 

at the back of this manual.

"

?%<)"%,@
)	
!





$

 
 	


# 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 81

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

END POINT "


!$



The End Point function adjusts the left and right 

servo throws, generates differential throws, and 

will correct improper linkage settings. 

The travel rate can be varied from 0% to 140% 

in each direction on channels 1 to 12(FASSTest 

12CH mode). Also, the limit point where servo 

throw stops may be varied from 0% to 155%.

Servo travel adjustment

10







:


# 
$!


-%:

 	



 <
&1CC

 %:!
	
&C1;C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

 #
# 
:!




!


'
$
$





Limit point adjustment

10


!$



:


# 
$!


-%:
!$ 	





 <
&1'9

 %:!
	
&C199

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the limit 

point is reset to the initial value.

 #
# 
:!




!


'
$
$


!$

 "

 ?,+ 
<#@  
 )	
 !
 




$

 
 	


# 

(The display screen is an example. The 

screen depends on the model type.)

"	

0	

%:	


#
5$	


!$




!$



82 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

SERVO SPEED "

$





The speed of the servo from 1CH to 12CH of 

operation can be set up. 

It can adjust to 0-27. 

Speed becomes slow as a numerical value's 0 

increases in the state of the fastest of the servo.

* Speed cannot be made quicker than the maximal rate of the 

servo to be used. 

Servo speed setting

1#
"$

 






-8

:!
 :



$



<
&C

%:!
	
&C-E
$

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

'
$
$





* It will overlap, if speed control of a S.BUS servo setup is 

used at the time of S.BUS servo use, and speed changes. 

Please use one either. 

* The speed of THR is not set up simultaneously with THR 

DELAY (model menu : only airplane).

"

?","
,,+@
)	
!





$

 
 	


# 

(The display screen is an example. The 

screen depends on the model type.)

"	

0	

%:	


#
5$	





$



$





<Functions of Linkage Menu> 83

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

THR CUT "$

	


$

$


Throttle cut provides an easy way to stop the 

engine. Generally speaking, modelers will do so 


!


The action is not functional at high throttle to 

avoid accidental dead stick landings. The switch’s 

location and direction must be chosen, as it defaults 

to NULL.

Individually adjust the Throttle Cut activation 

setting for each condition. (helicopter)

Throttle cut setting procedure

1%

&

 0


?%*#@
!


# 
$

!


 "


%*#!
 	





*The display blinks.

 # 
 #   
 




!


-"

&

 0


?"7@
!



  
$ 

  	 


# 







*For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch 

Setting Method] at the back of this manual.

'#
$
	&

 0


?
"@
!


# 
$

!


 %:

$
$


$
 	



 <
&1E

 %:!
	
&C9C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo 

operation position is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!




!


*With the selected cut switch ON and the throttle stick at idle; 

adjust the rate until the engine consistently cuts off.

 However, be sure that the throttle linkage is not pulled too 

tight or unreasonable force is not applied to the servo.

Designating a Throttle Cut setting position. 

(helicopter)

*A throttle cut function acts in the low side of the throttle 

position.

*"THRO" setting is common with all condition.

Q
#

 Normal setting is slightly above idle.

1#
#
*$4



  

 
 #/ $

	




4
$

# 





*Since conditions are not offered when an Airplane is selected, 

the Throttle Cut options will vary from the options noted 

below.

*The Throttle Cut POS and SW settings are utilized for all 

conditions.

*If the Throttle Cut switch is activated, or on, this status will 

continue even if the condition is changed to an inhibited 

setting.

*If the condition is inhibited (INH) the Throttle Cut is off if 

the SW is in the off position and the throttle stick is low.

"

?#/*8#@
)	
!





$

 
 	


# 

*

$

<:
#
* 
	

$


*$

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#




#




#


$
84 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

B9	'QF )


	
	$

$


The Idle Down function lowers the engine to 

its idle position. Like Throttle Cut, this is usually 





stick at idle. The action is not functional at high 

throttle to avoid accidental dead sticks. The 

switch’s location and direction must be chosen, as 

it defaults to NULL.

Idle down setting procedure

1%

&

 0


?%*#@
!


# 
$

!


 "


%*#!
 	





*The display blinks.

 # 
 #   
 




!


-"

&

 0


?"7@
!




$

 	
#

 "





*For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch 

Setting Method] at the back of this manual.

'


	&

 0


?",#@
!


# 


$!


 %: 
 
 
 
  
 

$
 	



 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31CCC1CC

* When a minus rate is input, an offset is applied at the high 

side.

*Maximum offset amount is near maximum slow.

* When the RTN button is touched for one second, the offset 

rate is reset to the initial value.

 #
# 

:!




!


"

?<+),+7@
)	
!





$

 
 	


# 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


*

$
<Functions of Linkage Menu> 85

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

Q=	(BF,

Swash ring setting procedure

1%

&

 0


?%*#@
!


# 
$

!


 "


%*#!
 	





*The display blinks.

 # 
 #   
 




!


-

	&

 0


?%#,@
!


# 
$!


 "


 	



 <
&1CC

 %:!
	
&9C-CC

*Adjust the rate to maximum swash tilt.

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

 #
# 
:!




!


)!
$

>5
	
/
$


This function limits the swash travel to a fixed 

range in order to prevent damaging the swash 

linkage by simultaneous operation of the ailerons 

and elevators. It is very useful in 3D aerobatics 

which use a large travel.

 #
$
		
$
&

 #
 
 
  




 
 #
 







 #
 !
  


$

"

?"7%"/<.@
)	


!



$



 
 	
#

 

7

	
4

 
  $
  
 $
	

	
$


$ 5

$
"$
!







"	

0	

"

	!


%:	

86 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

Q= "%	


$
4
5
$

$
/31

Neutral Point

At your linkages, if the servo horn deviates from 

a perpendicular position at neutral, the linkage 

compensation functions in this menu may not 

compensate effectively. To correct this use the 

Neutral Point function. This will move the neutral 

point of the servos to the actual perpendicular 

position. However, this adjustment changes only 

the axis point of the compensation functions in this 

menu, and does not affect the neutral position of 

other functions.

Swash AFR

Swash AFR function reduces, increases, or 

reverses the rate (travel) of the aileron, elevator and 

collective pitch functions, by adjusting or reversing 

the motion of all servos involved in that function, 

only when using that function. 

Mixing Rate

This mixing is used to compensate the swashplate as necessary during specific control inputs. 

Neutral point setting procedure

The neutral point becomes the correction 

standard point.

*Adjusting the servo horn so that the neutral point is near the 

50% position makes the mixing amount small.

1
$
	

 0


?
"@
!


$$




		

	
#


# 

#





6
$

 %
 
	 
 
 $4 
 




!



:!


The following compensation mixing is possible; 

PIT to AIL, PIT to ELE, AIL to PIT, ELE to AIL, 

and ELE to PIT (HR3 mode.) It adjusts the swashplate to for proper operation of each control using 

the corresponding compensation mixing.

Linkage Compensation

This compensation mixing is used to correct the 

swash-plate for pitch control at low pitch and high 

pitch.

Speed Compensation

This function is used to cancel the reaction that 

is generated by the difference in the movements of 

each servo when the swash-plate moves.

Subtrim

Subtrim for aileron, elevator and pitch can be set 

during swash setting.

Pitch adjustment function



8


used while adjusting the pitch.

Swash AFR setting procedure

The swash AFR function makes adjustments so 




¤J¥

[ELE], and [PIT] operation.

10




:
# 


$!


-%:
%
 	





 <
&9C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the AFR 

rate is reset to the initial value.

 #
# 
:!




!


"

?"7%"/@
)	
!





$

 
 	


# 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 87

Mixing rate setting procedure

The HR3 swash-plate type will be used as an 

example to describe mixing rate setting. The mixing 

used in other swash modes may be different, 

however, the setting procedure is the same.

*Set the throttle stick to the preset neutral point. Adjust the 

length of the linkage rod so that the swash plate is horizontal 

at this position.

*The sub-trim function can be used to make small 

adjustments.

*Adjust so that the pitch curve is a straight line and the 

helicopter achieves maximum pitch.

*Move the cursor to the item you want to adjust and touch 

the RTN button to switch to the data input mode. Touch 

the RTN button to end adjustment and return to the cursor 

mode.

1%:	

$
?%<)
<#@

 %:
%<)
<#


 	




$!
!





!


	

*Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor.

*The left and right sides can be adjusted individually.

-%:	


$
?,),%<)@D

?,),
<#@

 %:
,),%<),),
<#




 	

$

!
!




!


$

*Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor.

*The up and down sides can be adjusted individually.

'%:	
$$
?
<#%<)@?
<#

,),@

 %:

<#%<)
<#,),



$
!



D

$




!
!5!!	

*Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor.

*The slow and high sides can be adjusted individually.

Linkage compensation setting procedure

*Prior to utilizing the linkage compensation settings, it is 

important to adjust the mixing rate settings.

*Linkage compensation overrides interference from the 

aileron operation with the elevator or elevator operation 

with the aileron at collective pitch control for low pitch and 

high pitch.

*When making the following setting, Move the cursor to the 

item you want to set and touch the RTN button to switch 

to the data input mode. Touch the RTN button to end 

adjustment and return to the cursor mode.

1*!$
	
$?%<)@

 "




$0






	

:

!$
!








$


!!

*Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor.

*The left and right sides can be adjusted individually.

*If the interference increases when the compensation amount 

was increased, make adjustments with the direction [DIR.] 

using the plus "+" or minus "-".

-*!$
	

$?,),@

 %:


!$
!

  
 
  $ 












!
$!!

'
$

$1- 
4$
!




!$
!




Speed compensation setting procedure

10
 
   
 2"
,,+2 
! 


# 


$!


-"
 
 
   
 
 $

$!





: 
 $

 !$
 !

?"
,,+@!!!




$




*Adjust by scrolling the touch sensor.

 #
# 
:!




!

88 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

Subtrim setting procedure

Subtrim can be set on the last page of the swash 

setting screen.

*The sub-trim value set here is reflected at sub-trim of the 

linkage menu.

Pitch adjustment procedure

The pitch adjustment function can be used on the 

last page of the swash setting screen.

1* 
  $	
  
  
	





-7
 
   !
   $

:!
   
 #  


4

$	$$

* In the pitch adjustment mode an * is displayed at the left 

side of the current output setting button.

*If the cursor is moved to another button and the RTN button 

is touched during pitch adjustment, the pitch adjustment 

mode is deactivated.

 

&

 

/	 /	$>5
$!



 
$>5
$!


) )$>5
$!


0	 *$$!


*The cyclic pitch speed can be set with the button at the right 

side of the “Moving” button.

 "
		
&11CC

*When the set value is large, motion becomes fast and when 

the set value is small, motion becomes slow.
<Functions of Linkage Menu> 89

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

T1-T4 SET. +	!
	

This function adjusts the digital trim's step 




#7,70$

When the flight conditions are set, the trim 

operation can be coupled with the conditions when 

combination mode is selected.

The T14SG unit of trim is displayed on the home 

screen.

Control step amount setting

10


?"#,
@
!


# 
$

!


-"


$! 	





 <
&;

 %:!
	
&C-CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the control 

step amount is reset to the initial value.

*When the value is increased, the change per step becomes 

larger.

'#
# 
:!




!


Separate/combination mode selection (Heli and 

Glider only)

10


?0+,@
!


# 


$!


-"

 
 !
  	 
 


%>!!
	
$$


*The display blinks.

 ?*0@&*! !
#
!6


H

H	

 ?",
%@&"
$
!
#!:!



 !
   
 	



'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

Display unit selection

10
 
   
 ?8<#@ 
! 


# 


$!


-"

 
 !
  	 
 


%>!!
	
$$


*The display blinks.

 ?33@&%
$! 
$

!




#

$

 ?@&22$


'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

Trim Memory Operation procedure

10


?#13#;0,0A@
!


# 


$!


-"


%*#!
 	



%>!!
	
$$


 ?</@&< 


 ?%*#@&%


'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;%
!


4!




!	

#



#
!$!





$

*When the function is inhibited, the trim position returns to 

the actual trim position.

Only the trim displayed on the home screen can 

be moved to the center position without changing 

the actual trim's memory position. 

"

?#13#;",#@
)	
!





$

 
 	


# 

(The display screen is an example. The 

screen depends on the model type.)

#!$
!


2*02&*! !


2",
%2&"
$
!


"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


*The display blinks.
90 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

Q(FBF, )
!	

7	!



The T14SG includes an audible alarm that 

sounds when the transmitter’s battery voltage drops 

below a pre-determined setting; adjustable for cell 

types and voltages.

Mixing warning at power ON can be reset to 

OFF.

Accessing and Activating the Low Battery 

Alarm

1#
 ) 
 )7 %##,A !

	
  

 	 
 #1;". 

"
!0
7
"
!0
4



"
#		
"8+

$  
 $
 
 
 #

 >!




-8
 
 "
#    
 )


)7%##,A!4
$




# 

	



	8	
"
#4:


	


D

!
 


!
 
$ 
	


#
	
$	
!9CFC

"		

	

	
&

5-Cell NiCd or NiMH: 5.6V

2-Cell LiFe: 6.0V 

Q
#	
	

#	
"

10



!




# 


$!


-"


!
 	





*The display blinks.

'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

Q
#	
Z

%$
& #
 D<
 D#


$D"$3D0$D% 
D

0

/
$
& *D#
 D#


$D#
/

.
&*D0$D#!3!5D0

 "

 ?7%<.@  
 )	
 !
 




$

 
 	


# 


S1 

5$	


"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


*About low battery voltage, all the models included in one 

transmitter are changed in common. It cannot set to different 

voltage for every model. Moreover, data reset is not carried 

out.
<Functions of Linkage Menu> 91

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

TELEMETRY +$	!





This screen displays your choice of data from the 

receiver.

Also warnings can be activated regarding 

other data from your aircraft. For example, if the 

receiver voltage drops, the user can be warned by 

an alarm (and vibration).

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.

*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in 

FASSTest12CH mode.

*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions. 

 "

 ?#,),0,#A@  
 )	
 !
 




$

 
 	


# 


S1 

5$	


[TELEMETRY] 


HOME/EXIT 

$
!home screen

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	





3£#!
#




$
	

How to see telemetry date

1#

!


 


/0,D

,<# $
!
!






?#,),0,#A@
)	
!





$

 	


# 

-<

!

# 

$
4!
$ 
$
!


 
 !!!D!5!! 
 

!



*Receiver voltage can be checked immediately. An optional 

sensor will need to be attached to S.BUS2 of a receiver if 

you would like to see other information. 

*No special setup is necessary if each sensor displayed 

is left as in the default setup. Separate sensor ID 

is also unnecessary. However, if two or more of 

one kind of sensor is used, setup is required in the 

"SENSOR" menu.

Q
#

 Do not watch the transmitter screen during 



~

	

	


extremely dangerous. Have an assistant on hand to check 

the screen for you. A pilot should NEVER take his eyes off 

his aircraft.
92 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

TELEMETRY : Rx-BATT. +$	!



 
	


In this screen, the battery voltage of a receiver is 

displayed.

If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an 

alarm and/or vibration will alert you.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.

*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in 

FASSTest12CH mode.

*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

"

?53%##@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	


# 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	





 
	


#
!5!!
!!!


$
	


  ¤ #  
  2     2           


   ! 

 
 
 	


$ 


	

Alert set 

10


¤%),#?</@
!


# 


$!


-"


%*#!
 	





'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;0


¤#/,"/)+?;C@


!
# 


$!


9%:

 	



 <
&;C

 %:!
	
&CCB;

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4

"Vibes" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter will 

vibrate during the warning.
<Functions of Linkage Menu> 93

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

TELEMETRY : EXT-VOLT +$	!
,# 
	
$

The EXT-VOLT screen will display the data 

from the EXT-battery output from the R7008SB 

receiver. In order to use this function, it is necessary 

to connect External voltage connector of the 

R7008SB receiver to a CA-RVIN-700 (FUTM5551) 

or SBS-01V to the battery you desire to measure 

the voltage of.

You will be alerted by an alarm or vibration if 

the voltage set by you is exceeded.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.

*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage will be received in 

the FASSTest12CH mode.

*The FASSTest14CH mode will display all telemetry data.

"

?,#3)#@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	


# 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


,# 
	


#
!5!!
!!!


$
	


¤#



!



	
$ 




	

Alert set 

10


¤%),#?</@
!


# 


$!


-"


%*#!
 	





'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;0


¤#/,"/)+?;C@


!
# 


$!


9%:

 	



 <
&;C

 %:!
	
&CC1CCC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4

"Vibes" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter will 

vibrate during the warning.

*CA-RVIN-700 or SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
94 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

TELEMETRY : TEMP. +$	!

!$



TEMP. is a screen which displays/sets up 

the temperature information from an optional 

temperature sensor. 

The temperature of the model (engine, motor, 



$





If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an 

alarm and/or vibration will alert you.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.

*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in

FASSTest12CH mode.

*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

"

?#,0
@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	


# 




 S1 


5$	


"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


#
!$



#
!5!!
!!!


$
	


 ¤ %  

!

  
 


 
 ! $ 
      
     $ 

 





¥%$

   !

  
 



!$


 







Alert set : Hot warning 

10
 
   
 ¥%),# 
! 


# 


$!


-"


%*#!
 	





'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;0


¥#/,"/)+?1CC°C @


!
# 


$!


9%:

 	



 <
&1CC°C

 %:!
	
&1°C -CC°C

¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

Alert set : Low-temperature warning

1-D-$	


 $	"10




¤%),#
!


# 
$!


-"


%*#!
 	





'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;0


¤#/,"/)+?C °C @


!
# 


$!


9%:

 	



 <
&C°C

 %:!
	
&C°C 1GG°C

¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4

"Vibes" type

If the following types are selected, the 

transmitter will vibrate during the warning.

*A temperature sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
<Functions of Linkage Menu> 95

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

TELEMETRY : RPM +$	!

0

RPM is a screen which displays / sets up the 

RPM information from an optional RPM sensor. 

The RPM of the model (engine, motor, etc.) 





If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an 

alarm and/or vibration will alert you. 

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.

*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in

FASSTest12CH mode.

*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

"

?
0@
#,),0,#A






$



 
 	
# 




 S1 


5$	


"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	



0

#
!5!!
!!!


$
	


20%.,#<*22
#<*%)2


	






""3C10&0%.,#<*

""3C1&
#<*%)

¤%


  


    !           




0

 





 ¥% $ 


  


    !           


 
 
0 


 





Alert set : Over rotations 

10
 
   
 ¥%),# 
! 


# 


$!


-"


%*#!
 	





'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;0
 
   
 ¥#/,"/)+

?-CCC$!@
!
# 


$!


9%:

 	



 <
&-CCC$!

 %:!
	
&1$!19C4CCC$!

¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

Alert set : Under rotations

1"

$	
 $	"1

0
 
   
 ¤%),# 
! 


# 


$!


-"


%*#!
 	





'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;0


¤#/,"/)+?C$!@


!
# 


$!


9%:

 	



 <
&C$!

 %:!
	
&C$!1;G4GGG$!

¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4

"Vibes" type

If the following types are selected, the 

transmitter will vibrate during the warning.

 < 20%.,#<*24 
 	
 


	
!


	




<2
#<*%)24
! 


 

$$



!





*A RPM sensor must be installed in the aircraft.
96 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

TELEMETRY : ALTITUDE +$	!



ALTITUDE is a screen which displays / sets up the 

altitude information from an optional altitude sensor or 

3+%7
	



be known. If it becomes higher (low) than preset altitude, 

you can be told by alarm. To show warning by vibration 

can also be chosen. Data when a power supply is turned 

on shall be 0 m, and it displays the altitude which 


	_	
	



high, that shall be 0 m and the altitude difference from an 

airfield is displayed. This sensor calculates the altitude 

from atmospheric pressure. Atmospheric pressure will 

get lower as you go up in altitude, using this the sensor 

will estimate the altitude. Please understand that an exact 

advanced display cannot be performed if atmospheric 

pressure changes in a weather situation.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.

*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in 

FASSTest12CH mode.

*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

"

?%)#<#8+,@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	
# 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


%


 #
 !5!!  
 !!! 


$
	


¤%


 
 !





       
   
    
 

 




  ¥  %    $          



!








 






First, the set of a reference is required.

1#
 !
  !
   










-0


?",#@2,,,*,2


!
# 


$!


'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1 

*Atmospheric pressure is changed according to the weather also 




~	


Alert set : High side 

10
 
   
 ¥%),# 
! 


# 


$!


-"


%*#!
 	





'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;0


¥#/,"/)+?-CC!@


!
# 


$!


9%:

 	



 <
&-CC!

 %:!
	
&3;GG!94CCC!

¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

Alert set : Low side

1"

$	
 $	"10




¤%),#
!


# 
$!


-"


%*#!
 	





'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;0


¤#/,"/)+?39C!@


!
# 


$!


9%:

 	



 <
&39C!

 %:!
	
&39CC!;4GGG!

¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1 

TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4

"Vibes" type

If the following types are selected, the 

transmitter will vibrate during the warning.

*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.




"1 


5$	

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 97

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

TELEMETRY : VARIO +$	!
!



VARIO is a screen which displays / sets up the 

variometer information from an optional altitude 

sensor or GPS sensor. 

7
	



be known.

If it becomes higher or lower than the setting an 

alarm and/or vibration will alert you.

To ensure that the pilot is aware as to the model's 

status, the T14SG incorporates a different melody 

for ascent and descent. Additionally, depending 

upon the rate of climb or descent, the tones vary to 

indicate whether or not the airplane is climbing or 

descending at a rapid rate. 

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.

*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in

FASSTest12CH mode.

*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

"

?%<@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	
#

 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


!



 #
 !5!!  
 !!! 


$
	


<
%*#4!
 

	




4
$
	



 ¤ %  



!








 






  ¥  %    $          



!








 






Alert set : Rise side 

10
 
   
 ¥%),# 
! 


# 


$!


-"


%*#!
 	





'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;0


¥#/,"/)+?C!D@


!
# 


$!


9%:

 	



 <
&C!D

 %:!
	
&3;G!D9C!D

¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

Alert set : Dive side

1"

$	
 $	"1

0
 
   
 ¤%),# 
! 


# 


$!


-"


%*#!
 	





'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;0


¤#/,"/)+?C!D@


!
# 


$!


9%:

 	



 <
&C!D

 %:!
	
&39C!D;G!

¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1 

TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4

"Vibes" type

*An altitude sensor or GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

If the following types are selected, the 

transmitter will vibrate during the warning.




"1 


5$	

98 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

TELEMETRY : BATTERY +$	!
 
	


In this screen, the battery voltage is displayed. 

In order to use this function, it is necessary to 

connect External voltage connector of R7008SB ⇔

SBS-01V ⇔ Battery 

SBS-01V measures two batteries. The drive 

battery connected to two lines is displayed on EXTVOLT. The battery for receivers connected to 3P 

lines is displayed here. 

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.

*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in

FASSTest12CH mode.

*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

"

?%##,A@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	


# 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


 
	


#
!5!!
!!!


$
	


¤#



!



	
$ 




	

Alert set 

10


¤%),#?</@
!


# 


$!


-"


%*#!
 	





'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;0


¤#/,"/)+?;C@


!
# 


$!


9%:

 	



 <
&;C

 %:!
	
&CCB;

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4

"Vibes" type

If the following types are selected, the transmitter will 

vibrate during the warning.

*SBS-01V must be installed in the aircraft.
<Functions of Linkage Menu> 99

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

TELEMETRY : DISTANCE +$	!



Distance is a screen that displays and sets the 

altitude data from an SBS-01G (GPS Sensor) sold 

separately. The distance to the airborne aircraft 

can be read by the transmitter. When the aircraft 

#$



alerted by an alarm and vibration.

*The GPS sensor sold separately is necessary. Mount and 

connect the sensor in accordance with the sensor instruction 

manual. 

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.

*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in

FASSTest12CH mode.

*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

"

?+<"#%*,@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	
#

 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


*



+
!
		


1! ~94CCC!

*Alarm when the aircraft moves far 

away.

¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+

+
!
		
C!~;4GGG!

¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+

 05!! 
 


!



 #
 ¤ 

            !   

	 
  
    
     
 


 
 $

 





 #
 ¥ 

            !   

	


 


  
   
       
   


5




First, the set of a reference is required.

1#
!
!

.
"








-<
.
"

	

$


 
!




'0


?",#@2,,,*,2


!
# 


$!


;#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1 

*Now, the position of the present model was set to 0 m.

Alert setting when aircraft goes too far

10
 
   
 ¥%),# 
! 


# 


$!


-"


%*#!
 	





'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;0


¤#/,"/)+?14CCC!@


!
# 


$!


9%:

 	



*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4

"Vibes" type

*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

If the following types are selected, the 

transmitter will vibrate during the warning.




 S1 


5$	


*

*

<


	!.
"

"




 
!
'

$4$?,,,*,@
100 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

*

Surface

Slant

Altitude

%
 
 



	    







!$

 





'D'

Alert setting when the aircraft approaches

1%
 
 
 $	
  $	 "1

0
 
   
 ¤%),# 
! 


# 


$!


-"


%*#!
 	





'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;0


¤#/,"/)+?C!@
!


# 


$!


9%:

 	



*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 "



"

?+<"#%*,@
#,),0,#A

 	


RTN %S1 



Two displays methods, straight line distance and 

surface distance, can be selected as shown above.

1"

$	
' 	
"1 


!
¦+<"#%*,§



-"

 ̈")%#£ ̈"8%*,£
5¦0+,§4




!



# 
<Functions of Linkage Menu> 101

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

TELEMETRY : SPEED +$	!
$



The speed screen displays and sets the speed data 

from an SBS-01G (GPS sensor) sold separately.

The speed of the aircraft during flight can be 

displayed.

After flight, the maximum speed during flight 

can be viewed. Because this speed is based on 

position data from a GPS satellite, the ground speed 

is displayed instead of air speed. Consequently, 

with a head wind, the displayed speed decreases 

and with a tail wind, the displayed speed increases.

*It cannot be used in FASST mode and S-FHSS mode.

*Only receiver voltage and EXT voltage can be used in 

FASSTest12CH mode.

*The FASSTest14CH mode can use all the telemetry functions.

"

?"
,,+@
#,),0,#A






$

 
 	
# 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


+$

$



+$
!5!!$





!



"$

!
		


1 ~ 9CC!D

¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+

*Alarm when the speed has increased.

"$

!
		
C ~ ;GG!D

¥#/,"/)+£¤#/,"/)+

*Alarm when the speed has decreased.

 #
 ¤  

  ! 

	


 



 $

 $

 





#
¥

  ! 

	


 



$


5








Alert setting when speed increases

1"
¦¥%),#§
 ̈"
,,+£

%*#

0

</
#

 

-"


%*#!
 	





'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;#
$

!	




 

 

	
$

$
5¦¥

#/,"/)+§	
# #

	


!

$





9%:

 	



*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset 

to the initial value.

F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

Alert setting when speed decreases

1"

$	
- $
	"1!
 ̈"
,,+£




¦¤%),#§%*#

-"


%*#!
 	





'#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

;#
 $

   ! 	




 

 

	
!
$


5¦¤#/,"/)+§	
#

 #!

$








9%:

 	



*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is reset 

to the initial value.

F#
# #
!

$



	
4
"1

 

*Speed alarm precaution

Since the GPS speed sensor displays the ground speed, it cannot 

be used as a stall alarm. For example, an aircraft that stalls 

at 50km/h will stall if the tailwind is 5km/h or greater even 

through 55km/h is displayed by ground speed. In addition, 




	


0BB!6


an over-speed alarm, when the headwind reaches 30km/h the 

airplane will disintegrate in midair due to over speeding even at 

a ground speed of 370km/h.

*A GPS sensor must be installed in the aircraft.

TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4

"Vibes" type

If the following types are selected, the 

transmitter will vibrate during the warning.




"1 


5$	

102 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

SENSOR 

!


	

This screen registers the telemetry sensors used 

with the transmitter. When only one of a certain 

type of sensor is used, this setting is unnecessary 

and the sensor can be used by simply connecting it 

to the S.BUS2 port of the transmitter.

When using 2 or more of the same kind of 

sensor, they must be registered here. 

"

?","@
)	
!





$ 

 
 

	
# 

 "
 <+& 7
 !$
 
  


!
$


4<+



%
 
 
4!


=
'	

.
"

=
B	<4

.
"

""3C1.
B41F4-;4FE
 


< Assignable slot > *Altimeter, GPS, and other sensors that display a large amount of data require multiple slots.

*Depending on the type of sensor, the slot numbers that can be allocated may be limited.

Q"
		
	

Servos are classified by CH, but sensors are 

classified in units called “slot”. There are slots

from No. 1 to No. 31.

Altitude sensors, GPS sensors and other data 

sensor units may use multiple slots.

Using a sensor which uses two or more slots, 

the required number of slots is automatically 

assigned by setting up a start slot.

When 2 or more of the same kind of sensor are 

used, the sensors themselves must allocate unused 

slots and memorize that slot.

*3 slots of altitude sensor are used.

*8 slots of GPS sensor are used.

3ENSOR 4HEREQUIRED

NUMBEROFSLOTS 4HENUMBERWHICHCANBEUSEDASASTARTSLOT 3ELLINGAREA

4%-03"3
4	 SLOT  ~ 

'LOBAL

20-3"32-3"3


2/	 SLOT  ~ 

6OLTAGE3"3
6	 SLOTS 



!LTITUDE3"3
!	 SLOTS 



'033"3
'	 SLOTS 

4%-0
& SLOT  ~ 

%UROPE 6!2)/
& SLOTS 



6!2)/
& SLOTS 



'03
& SLOTS 

  
  
 
  !

 
=
 '
<Functions of Linkage Menu> 103

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

*$	
E 	
"1 F!
!


?","@!


SENSOR : RELOAD

SENSOR : REGISTER

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.

When using multiple sensors of the same type 

the sensors must be registered in the transmitter. 

Connect all the sensors to be used to the T14SG as 





the following procedure. The ID of each sensor is 

registered in the transmitter.

This function registers an additional sensor. 

Connect the sensor as shown in the figure at the 

right and register it by the following procedure. 

The sensor ID is registered in the transmitter.

All the sensors to be used are connected. SENSOR SENSOR

3-way hub 

or Y-harnesses

5HFHLYHUV

%DWWHU\

76*

SENSORSENSORSENSOR

3-way hub 

or Y-harnesses

5HFHLYHUV

%DWWHU\

76*

SENSOR

Reading all the sensors to be used

1 *
  
 
  




 

 


#1;".	

 
>	
 


-0

¦,)+§$	
E


?","@



'#
# 

%



	

 





Additional sensor registration

1*





 


 


#1;".	 


>	

	

-0

¦,.<"#,§$	
E


 ̈"
£



'#
# 

#


	

 



*When the number of slots needed in registration is 

	







performed. Disable unused slots or perform the following 

relocate.
104 <Functions of Linkage Menu>

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

This function secures contiguous unused slots 

by rearranging the registration state when sensor 

registration and deregistration are performed 

repeatedly and the unused slots are fragmented.

Relocate of sensors to be used

1 *
  
 
  




 

 


#1;".	

 
>	
 


-0

¦,)*%#,§$	
E


?","@



'#
# 

This procedure changes the slot No. of one 

registered sensor.

Sensor slot change

1*





 


 
	

#1;".	 


>	
 


-0

¦",#")#§$	
E


 ̈"
£



'#
# %





$$


;0

¦)%+§


# 

9#

$
0




! 



	




(* 



 





 
$	
)

F0

¦7<#,§


# 

All the sensors to be used are connected. SENSOR SENSOR

3-way hub 

or Y-harnesses

5HFHLYHUV

%DWWHU\

76*

SENSORSENSORSENSOR

SENSOR : RELOCATE

SENSOR : SET SLOT

3-way hub 

or Y-harnesses

5HFHLYHUV

%DWWHU\

76*

SENSOR

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.

This page is set when using multiple telemetry sensors of the same type.

*$	
E 	
"1 F!
!


?","@!

<Functions of Linkage Menu> 105

"


!




)	


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT         

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

DATA RESET 0
!
!
	



This function is designed to allow you to reset 

trim settings or all of the settings saved in the active 

model memory. You may individually choose to 

reset the following data;

T1~T4:

Reset the digital trim setting.

*The trim step amount and trim rate are not reset.

Data resetting method

10



!




# 







-,5



 	
# 



#
"1 





	

 ?#13#;@&


#13#;

 ?%))0+,)",##<.@&




 
 )	
 !
  0
 !



5
$

=
4!


4

!
$


?#,),0,#A@& 

  
 

!




All model setting:

Resets all Linkage and Model Menu functions 

except for Frequency, Model Select, Low battery 

voltage, and Model Type.

*If the Model Type selected is Glider, the motor function 

channel is automatically reversed in the Reverse menu; all 

other channels remain normal.

TELEMETRY:

Reset the telemetry setting.

"

?+%#%,",#@
)	
!





$

 
 	


# 

"	

0	
106 <Model Menu (Common Functions)>

MODEL MENU (COMMON FUNCTIONS)

This section describes the D/R, program mixing, 

and other functions common to all model types.

Before setting the model data, use the Model 

Type function of the Linkage menu to select the 

model type matched to the aircraft. If a different 

model type is selected afterwards, the D/R, program 

mixing, and other parameters are reset.

If either a helicopter or glider have been selected 



	

[
	
	

you want to switch the settings for each condition 

by switch, stick position, etc., use the Condition 

%	
#^

conditions can be used)

Note: The T14SG is designed so that the airplane 

and glider (including EP glider) model types 

are compatible with aircraft of similar type 

wings.

 This section outlines the relationship between 

the functions common to airplanes and 

gliders, except some dedicated functions, 

and model type.

 The setting menus will depend on the number 

of servos and other differences according to 

the wing type used. The setup screens in the 

instruction manual are typical examples.

*The Model menu screen depends on the 

model type.

Model Menu functions (Common) list

(?'

%


#


description of its functions, see the Linkage Menu 

section.)

2'FB7B'F	


		"

	
	

#
	

$

  
  


condition renaming, and condition delay can be set. 

)9	(7

The D/R curve of a T14SG transmitter may be 



	
!

information on how to do so, please refer to the 

Switch Setting Method located at the back of this 

manual.

(',E	BA

The T14SG transmitter allows up to five 

completely customizable program mixes.

%

!
!
 
 

	
0+) 

!




4


*

"

 
 

!
  
 


 0
 !
 

	
 RTN

   HOME/

EXIT $


<SensorTouchTM>

 "

 
     
 




$

 	
#

 

"	

0	

#
5$	


RETURN
<Model Menu (Common Functions)> 107

"


!




0


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

CONDITION 	 6  	!
4 $4 $ 	
 


 

?
5
$$
$
@

This function, in the Model menu, can be used 

	q

Please note this is not applicable to airplane type 

selections.

Note: To prevent accidental activation of any 


	





switch setting of those unused conditions to 

null [--].

 % * +
   
 


8


	
!! 


	







	




$






$
	!
 





 	  	 #



 







!5!!$
!
!

7

	

$
>

H	4


	



  
 
$	  
 


!

 < !$
  

 
4 


$
$! 
!






#&

$

 "

 ?*+<#<@  
 0
 !
 




$

 
 	


# 

 "


$
 

	

#
4


# 

*The current condition can not be selected for the copy 

destination condition.

'0
 
   
 ?*
A@ 
! 

 
 #  % !

!
	
$$


*The display blinks.

;#
# 




 $	  !$

 # 
 "1

 $$	

	"
#


10


$$3

3	



# 

 #
$

$	

	
#
 
!



	
$

*The Normal condition cannot be changed or moved, its 

priority is always the lowest.

2	!"	

@



10



!




D







$

 	


# 









	¤%

Setting Method] at the back of this manual.

2	

#%
@$

10


?"8*,@
!


# 


$!


 "


$
 	



#
4
# 

-0


?+,"#<@
!


# 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


#&
$ #&$
108 <Model Menu (Common Functions)>

2	

	
#

#%
D$

1"





-0


2+,)%A2





#

 
$!


 %:

! 	





 <
&C

 %:!
	
&C-E!5!!


'#
# 
:!




!

<Model Menu (Common Functions)> 109

"


!




0


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

)9	(7 #
	


 

?%!
$
@

Dual rate function is used to adjust the amount 

of throw and the operational curve of the stick 

	#


$	


q
	
	






(

operational curve of the throttle function.

This is normally used after the End Point 

programming has been completed to define the 

maximum throw. When mixing is applied from one 

channel to another channel, both channels can be 

adjusted at the same time by adjusting the operation 

rate through the dual rate function.

Neutral position of the dual rate curve can be 

set. 

'

	J+J+@j^77_\J~


&[j_\	
#
6

Glider)

J+@
j^77_\J~

	

 _  ̈ +  
                   
                J  +

J+@j^77_\J~
&[j_\	



J+J+@


 j^77_\J~ &[j_\ 	 #&

switching only)

"

?+8%)%#,@
0
!





$

 
 	


# 

#&
3$


$

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


)
D	$D


$


D	4$D

"



?%$
@

?/
$
D	
@

*0






"!






*



"



^
	
	




110 <Model Menu (Common Functions)>


	

	
#	



1



 0







!
# 


$!


 "


: 

	



 #
# 
!


-"



 0


¢
!




$

 	


# "




!
  
  $ 

$$ 




	¤%

Setting Method] at the back of this manual.

')
D	$D
:!


+	
	
3

condition you want to adjust.

 0




!

:
# 


$!


 %:

 	



 <
&1CC

 %:!
	
&C1;C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo 

operation position is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!




!


 
$
$









;$

,

:!


+	
	
3

condition you want to adjust.

 0


,

!

:
# 


$!


 %:

 	



 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo 

operation position is reset to the initial value.)

^_ ̈+			

control inputs around center to avoid over-controlling the 

model. This is often used for the ailerons, elevator and 

rudder and may be used with the throttle in the case of an 

airplane selection to smoothe the engine controls as well.

 #
# 
:!




!


 
$
$









9
$:!


+	
	
3

condition you want to adjust.

 0


?#@
!


# 
$

!


 %:

 	



 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the neutral 

position is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 
!

<Model Menu (Common Functions)> 111

"


!




0


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

(',E	BA 
	!!5	 


!
8$
!5	

 


!
?%!
$
@

Programmable mixing may be used to correct 

undesired tendencies of the aircraft, and it may also be 

	

[8


that the motion of a command channel, called the 

"master," is added to the motion of the mixed channel, 

called "slave."

~


[



%

#£7£$78

#J
6q5$

~



[8=E6=




have mixing remaining on all the time. 

The Programmable mixing includes a powerful link 

function, which allows Programmable mixing to be 

linked with the special mixing functions, or with other 

programmable mixing functions. The link function can 

be set up for Master and Slave channel individually.

"

?
.0<@
0
!





$

 
 	


# 

)
	

#!!

	

D

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


	
	

	


 0


!5¢






$

 	
# 

?)

@ ?93$
@

*
!5

0
*/

"
*/

"



*


 

4A *




05	
)
D	4$D



$139

05¢

#E		
#	





	"
	E

 0


?%*#@
!


# 
$

!


 "


%*#!
 	





*The display blinks.

 # 
 #   
 




!


7	

#=E=

$

=E6=
8



function is activated.
112 <Model Menu (Common Functions)>

'F@'&&	!"	
#

 0
 
   
  
! 




$

 	


# 









	¤%

Setting Method] at the back of this manual.



¤55¥



	"

	
#

10


?0%"#,@
!


# 


$!


 "


 	





*The display blinks.

 #
# 	





!


-7
!5	


!5
4!


?)<I@
!


# 


$!


 "

 
  !
4 

 ?@  ?3@4 

	



*The display blinks.

 #
# 

!




!


*Check to ensure that the link mode is functioning properly 

by operating the mix accordingly.

*Master channel control can be set to activate based on the 

amount of stick input, or VR input, neither of which include 

7'6\
8


setup screen is displayed by touching the RTN button with 

"H/W" selected in the function selection. Select master 


#7
£6<£

¤55¥


\7E



	"

	
#

10


?")%,@
!


# 


$!


 "


 	





*The display blinks.

 #
# 	





!


-7
!5	


!5
4!


?)<I@
!


# 


$!


 "


!
?@?3@ 	





*The display blinks.

 #
# 

!




!


*Check the direction by actual operation.

7	
	'F@'&&	
#

17
		
!!
4!




?#<0@
!
#

 
$!


 "

D 	



*The display blinks.

 #
# 	

!

!
 D  
  
 

!


7
8	
¤=E¥

	¤=¥

*Effective when a function is set in the master channel.

9

	
	
#

?

	@

10


!5	

	


!
# 


$!


 %:

 	



 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo 

operation position is reset to the initial value.

 #
# 
:!




!


-
$
$









?
	






@

10


?"@
	
!


# 


$!


 %:


 	





 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo 

operation position is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!




!


-
$
$






;	
	
#

?

	@

10


$

	
!

:
# 


$!


 %:

 	



 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo 

operation position is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!




!


-
$
  $

  
 $ 




<Model Menu (Common Functions)> 113

"


!




0


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

&)9	BA +

!5	
:

!5
$$ 



	
?%$
D
$
@

7	Y

adjustments of engines that offer mixture control 

carburetors.

Note: Initial settings does not assign fuel mix to 

any channel. Prior to utilizing the Fuel Mix 

settings, select an unused channel on your 

receiver and assign it accordingly for the 

mixture control. Additionally, please make 

sure that your [Control] and [Trim] are set to 

null [--].

"

?8,)0<@
0
!





$

 
 

	
# 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


%


	 %

 
	




	!





?%$
$
@

?/
$
$
@

,	

	

05	
$

 0

*
A
!
#

 
$!


"


$
 

	




# "


?A,"@


# 
114 <Model Menu (Common Functions)>

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 
:!




!


*Needle high trim works as high trim based on the center. 

#<!!7J$




	
#	

$

*This function is used to adjust the needle/engine rise 

characteristics during acceleration. This enables an 

acceleration function which temporarily increases the needle 

operation from the throttle stick.

 This function is used when there are symptoms of the 

mixture being too lean or too rich, which would be 

generated by sudden throttle stick inputs. 

 ?%



	%#,@




(	


 ?+!$	

	+80
<.@

7
	
#'$


 0




!

	

# 


$!


 %:

 	



*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 
:!




!


 ?$
$
	%*#
"@

*The operation point at which the acceleration setting will 

occur. If this point is exceeded, acceleration is performed.

 0


?%*#
"@
!




$

	

# 





 Note: When using the acceleration function, 

since the needle stroke is large, adjust your 

settings so there is no binding of your linkage.

#
		
#

* Operation linked with the throttle hold function, throttle cut 

function, and idle down function is possible. The throttle cut 

position can be adjusted accordingly. Set it to the full closed 

position.

 0






 
!   
 #  


$!


 %: 
 
 $  	 





 <
&#/*8#&1E4<+),+7&C

 %:!
 	
& #/ *8#& C9C4 <+),

+7&C1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!




!



#	
"

j		
¤^_J[ ̈¥	



J!
¤^E&7=E¥



	"
	E

10


?%*#@
!


# 
$

!


 "


%*#!
 	





*The display blinks.

 # 
 #   
 




!


$


-0


?0<@
!


# 
$

!


 "


!5	!
	


 	



*The display blinks.

 #
# 	

!




!


<¤[ ̈¥
¤[ ̈¥




8
<¤^E[ ̈¥

selected, the throttle stick position becomes the master.

;	
	
#

10


$

	
!

:
# 


$!


 %:

 	



 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo 

operation position is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 
:!




!


-
$
$


$

F


	"#"		
#

10
 
   
 


 	 !




!


$



 	
# "







	!





	¤%

Setting Method] at the back of this manual.

-0


#<0

!


# 


$!


 %:
!
 	





 <
&C

 %:!
	
&3'C'C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 115

MODEL MENU (AIRPLANE/GLIDER FUNCTIONS)

The dedicated mixes, etc. that are applicable 

when an airplane or glider model type is selected 

are displayed in this Model menu functions 

section. Prior to adjusting any of these mixes, etc. 

use the Model Type function in the Linkage menu 

to select the model type, wing type, and tail type 

matched to the aircraft. Other settings reset the 

data used in mixing function, etc.

For glider, many dedicated mixes can be set 

for each flight condition, as required. To switch 

the settings for each condition by switch or stick 

position, use the Condition Select function to add 

flight conditions. (Up to five conditions can be 

used)

Note: The T14SG is designed so that the airplane 

and glider model types can utilize aircraft of the 

same wing type.

The functions common to airplanes and gliders, with 

the exception of some dedicated functions, are 

written without regard to the model type.

While there may be differences, depending on the 

number of servos, etc. the wing type used, etc. the 

setup screens in the instruction manual are typical 

examples.

Model Menu functions list

PITCH CURVE

Compatible with VPP (Variable Pitch Propeller) 

function. [Airplane, general]

THR CURVE

THR curve function adjusts the throttle operation 

curve for optimum engine speed to throttle stick 

movement. [Airplane/glider, general]

THR DELAY

THR-DELAY function is used to slow the 

response of the throttle stick to simulate the slow 

response of a turbine engine, etc. [Airplane, 

general]

AIL DIFFERENTIAL

The left and right aileron differential can be 

adjusted independently. For glider, the differential 



8

(

[Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]

FLAP SETTING

76
	



(

independently for each servo according to the wing 


¤
6D
¥

AIL to CAMB.FLP

78





mode. It improves the roll axis characteristics. 

¤
6D
 ́D
¥

AIL to BRKFLP

78

!



mode. It improves the roll axis characteristics. 

¤30
¥

*The Model menu screen depends on 

the model type.

%

!
!
 
 

touching the MDL button twice at the home 

screen, etc.

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or a HOME/

EXIT button is pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

 "

 
 

you want to set and 

a c c e s s t h e s e t u p 

screen by touching 

the RTN button. 

Scrolling

0	

cursor

#
5$	
 RETURN
116 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

AIL 3

(Chip Aileron)

AIL 4 (Chip Aileron)

AIL1

(Main Aileron) AIL 2

(Main Aileron)

FLP 2 (Camber Flap)

FLP 1

(Camber Flap)

ELEVATOR

(ELEVATOR 2)

V-TAIL AILVATOR

FLP 3

(Brake Flap)

FLP 4

(Brake Flap) RUDDER 2

 Winglet

RUDDER 1

(RUDDER 2) RUDDER 

 Winglet ( ) at Flying wing ( ) at Flying wing

ELEVATOR

(AILERON 5) ELEVATOR 2

(AILERON 6)

AIL to RUD

This mix is used when you want to coordinate 

the rudder with aileron operation for banking at 

shallow angles. [Airplane/glider, general]

RUD to AIL

This function is used when you want to mix 

the ailerons with rudder input. Rudder is applied 



!	

[Airplane/glider, general]

CAMBER MIX

This mix adjusts the camber and corrects the 

elevators. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]

ELE to CAMBER

This mix is used when you want to the mix 





		

model. [Airplane/glider, 2 ailerons or more]

CAMB.FLP to ELE

This mix is used to correct for changes in attitude 

when the camber flaps are utilized. [Airplane/

D
 ́,
¥

BUTTERFLY (Crow)

This function is used to quickly slow the aircraft 

and/or reduce the altitude. [Glider, 2 ailerons or 

#
)D
 ́,
$¥

TRIM MIX

7



		


can be accessed by selecting a switch or condition 

selection as desired. [Glider, 2 ailerons or more]

AIRBRAKE

This function is used when airbrakes are 

necessary when landing or when diving, etc. during 

#
D
$

GYRO

This is a dedicated mix when a GYA Series gyro 

is used. [Airplane/glider, general]

V-TAIL

This function incorporates the elevators and 

rudder input for use with V-tail models. [Airplane/

5

¥

AILEVATOR (DUAL ELEVATOR)

This function adjusts the elevators and ailerons 

of models with elevator specifications. [Airplane/




¥

WINGLET

This function adjusts the left and right rudders 

of winglet models. [Airplane/glider, winglet 


¥

MOTOR

This function adjusts the operation speed when 

the motor of an F5B or other such EP glider is 

started by a switch. [Airplane/glider, general]

RUD to ELE

This function is used to correct rolling maneuvers 


!	¤

¥

SNAP ROLL

This function selects the snap roll switch and 

adjusts the amount of servo input. Servo speed can 

also be adjusted. [Airplane general]
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 117

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

This function adjusts the pitch curve for VPP 

(Variable Pitch Propeller) airplane.

*Up to 3 conditions can be set.

7

,°D°@

NOTE: When VPP is not assigned to any 

channel, the pitch curve is not displayed in 

the model menu. In this case, assign VPP to 

any channel on the function screen.

"

?
<#*8,@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown 

below by touching the RTN button.

*



Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


PIT CURVE ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
4	



Setting method

?		



1. Move the cursor to the # button at the top 

right side of the screen and touch the RTN 

button to switch to the data input mode. 

 "

 
 

   	 


touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to call the setting 

screen and return to the cursor mode.

2. Move the cursor to the switch item and 

touch the RTN button to access the selection 

screen. Select the switch and set its ON 

direction.

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

 "



-'

*The VPP conditions can also be checked in the HOME 

screen.

;	
	
#

?*


	@

1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting 


!:
#

button to switch to the data input mode.

 %:

 	



 <
&C

 %:!
	
&C1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

2. Repeat this procedure for each point.

?0	
$@

1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting 


!:
#

button to switch to the data input mode.

 %:

$ 	


sensor.

 <
&
1&C4
-&-94
'&9C4
;&

E94
9&1CC

 %:!
	
&8$-9


:	$

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve 

position is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

2. Repeat this procedure for each point.

?+

	D
	
$@

 Move the cursor to the curve point setting 


!


D


the RTN button for one second.

*
$
118 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

This function adjusts the throttle curve for 

optimum engine speed from throttle stick input.

*When throttle curve is set to ON when there is no throttle 

function; this curve acts as the motor function.

NOTE: If this throttle curve function is activated, 

you can not use the THR-EXP function within 

the DUAL RATE function simultaneously.

"

?#/*8,@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown 

below by touching the RTN button.

*



Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


THR CURVE ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4	



Setting method



	"
	E

10


?%*#@
!

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

mode. 

 Select the ON mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 

function and return to the cursor mode.

;	
	
#

?*


	@

1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting 


!:
#

button to switch to the data input mode.

 %:

 	



 <
&C

 %:!
	
&C1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

2. Repeat this procedure for each point.

?0	
$@

1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting 


!:
#

button to switch to the data input mode.

 %:

$ 	


sensor.

 <
&
1&C4
-&-94
'&9C4
;&

E94
9&1CC

 %:!
	
&8$-9


:	$

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve 

position is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

2. Repeat this procedure for each point.

?+

	D
	
$@

 Move the cursor to the curve point setting 


!


D


the RTN button for one second.

*
$
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 119

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

THR-DELAY function is used to slow the 

response of the throttle stick to simulate the slow 

response of a turbine engine, etc.

*This function is the same as THR of servo speed. If it sets up 

in great numbers, it overlaps and a THR servo becomes late 

further. Please do not let me overlap. Use either.

"

?#/+,)%A@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown 

below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


THR DELAY ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
4	



Setting method

'

	

	

$	
#

10


?+,)%A@
!

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

input mode. 

 %:


 	


sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&C-E!5!!


*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 

function and return to the cursor mode.
120 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

AIL 3

(Chip Aileron)

AIL 4

(Chip Aileron)

AIL1

(Main Aileron) AIL 2

(Main Aileron)

AIL DIFF. ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4-
!


The left and right aileron differential can be 

adjusted independently.

		


8

can be adjusted.

*The display screen is an example. The actual 

screen depends on the Model Type.

Setting method


	
@#"	
H


 0



%<)1;


	
	
!
# 

to switch to the data input mode. 

 %:

	
 	


touch sensor when the stick is moved to the 


	


 <
&1CC

 %:!
	
&C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

(Currently selected condition name)

"

?%<)+<@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown 

below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


?%$
-%-@

?.
;%-@

%

D	

:!



	


	
H
		
\	

mixing

 0


?8##,)A%+8"#@

item and touch the RTN button to switch to 

the data input mode. 

 %:



 	


touch sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 121

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

FLP 2

(Camber Flap)

FLP 1

(Camber Flap)

FLP 3

(Brake Flap)

FLP 4

(Brake Flap)

FLAP SET. ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4-H$!


76
	

#

)

FLP1/2, brake flaps: FLP3/4) can be adjusted 

independently for each servo according to the 

wing type.

#
$




$
H$ 


offset

The camber flaps of a 4-flap model can 

be mixed with the brake flaps. (BRKFLP to 

CMBFLP)

%D 



*The display screen is an example. The actual 

screen depends on the model type.

Setting method

&
	@!	
H


 0


$)
1;8$

Down item according to the wing type and 

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

$!
%:


$



by scrolling the touch sensor. 

 <
&1CC

 %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

(



		
H


 0


?",#@
!

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

$!
%:
$






point of each flap by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the 

reference point is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.



	"
	%
G
	&9		2

	&9	#

 0


?%*#@
!

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

!
"


%*#!
 	


touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 



!


$


 To select a switch, move the cursor to the 

?"7@
!
# 

the selection screen. Select the switch and 



%2332
	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

"

?)%
",#@
0
!



$

screen shown below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


(Glider: Currently selected condition name) $






point offset

 8 $  D +   

:!

122 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

AIL 3

(Chip Aileron)

AIL 4

(Chip Aileron)

AIL1

(Main Aileron) AIL 2

(Main Aileron)

FLP 2

(Camber Flap)

FLP 1

(Camber Flap)

AIL to CMBFLP ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4-
-$

more

This mix operates the camber flaps (FLP1/2) 

in the aileron mode. When the aileron stick 

is manipulated, the ailerons and camber flaps 

perform aileron operation simultaneously to 




8

#


D	!5	

H$


 

$

:


%D 



)	$ 
&)!5
!5


%:!



H$


Setting method



	"
	

 0


?%*#@
!

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

!
"


%*#!
 	


touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 



!


$


 When selecting a switch, move the cursor to 


?"7@
!
# 

call the selection screen. Select the switch 



%2332


	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

#	

	
H


 0


$)
1-


or right item according to the wing type 

and touch the RTN button to switch to the 

 $ !
 %: 
 !5	 


independently by scrolling the touch sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

9G	
	
#

 When linking a mix, move the cursor to the 

?)<I@ 
!   
 #  

switch to the data input mode. Select the 

ON mode by scrolling the touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to set the link mode 

and return to the cursor mode.

"

?%<)*0)
@
0


menu and access the setup screen 

shown below by touching the RTN 

button.

*The display screen is an example. The actual 

screen depends on the model type.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


(Glider: Currently selected condition name)
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 123

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

AIL 3

(Chip Aileron)

AIL 4

(Chip Aileron)

AIL1

(Main Aileron) AIL 2

(Main Aileron)

FLP 3

(Brake Flap)

FLP 4

(Brake Flap)

AIL to BRAKEFLP ?*
$	!
$
@&.
4;H$

This mix operates the brake flaps (FLP3/4) 

in the aileron mode. When the aileron stick is 






!
	

the aileron operation simultaneously and the roll 

axis is improved.

 #
 
 
  	 !5	 
  


:

$

H$


05			 

D 


	%?33@
	

)	 

&)!5
!5


"

?%<)I)
@
0


menu and access the setup screen 

shown below by touching the RTN 

button.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


%:!



H$


*The display screen is an example. The actual 

screen depends on the model type.

(Currently selected condition name)

Setting method



	"
	

 0


?%*#@
!

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

!
"


%*#!
 	


touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 



!


$


 When setting a switch, move the cursor to 


 ?"7@ 
!   
 # 

to access the selection screen. Select the 



%

2332
	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

#	

	
H


 0


$)
';


right item and touch the RTN button to switch 


$!
%:
!5	

rate independently by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

9G	
	
#

 To activate the mixing, move the cursor to 


?)<I@
!
# 

switch to the data input mode. Select the 

ON mode by scrolling the touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to set the link mode 

and return to the cursor mode.
124 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

RUDDER 2

RUDDER RUDDER

V-TAIL

RUDDER 2

Winglet

RUDDER 1

Winglet ( ) at Flying wing ( ) at Flying wing

AIL 3 AIL 3

(Chip Aileron) (Chip Aileron)

AIL1

(Main Aileron)

AIL 2

(Main Aileron)

AIL to RUD ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4	



Use this mix when you want to mix the rudders 

with aileron operation. This allows the aircraft to 

bank at a steep angle.

05			 

D 

%?33@
	

#
!5	
 
:


 "

 ?%<)  8+@  


Model menu and access the 

setup screen shown below by 

touching the RTN button.

*The display screen is an example. 

The actual screen depends on the 

model type.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


(Glider: Currently selected condition name)

Setting method



	"
	

 0


?%*#@
!

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

!
"


%*#!
 	


touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 



!


$


 When selecting a switch, move the cursor to 


?"7@
!
# 

call the selection screen. Select the switch 



%2332


	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

#	

	
H


 Move the cursor to the left or right item 

and touch the RTN button to switch to the 

 $ !
 %: 
 !5	 


independently by scrolling the touch sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 125

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

RUDDER 2

RUDDER RUDDER

V-TAIL

RUDDER 2

Winglet

RUDDER 1

Winglet ( ) ( ) at Flying wing at Flying wing

AIL 3 AIL 3

(Chip Aileron) (Chip Aileron)

AIL1

(Main Aileron)

AIL 2

(Main Aileron)

RUD to AIL ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4	



This function is used when you want to mix 

the ailerons with rudder input. It is used when 

rudder is applied during roll maneuvers such 

as, knife edge flight. It can be used to turn or 

bank scale models, large models, etc. like a fullsize aircraft.

05			 

D 


	%?33@
	

)	 

&)!5
!5


#
!5	
 
:


%93$
 

$
!
$


 "

 ?8+  %<)@  
 0


menu and access the setup screen 

shown below by touching the RTN 

button.

*The display screen is an example. 

The actual screen depends on the 

model type.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


Setting method



	"
	

 0


?%*#@
!

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

!
"


%*#!
 	


touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 



!


$


 When setting a switch, move the cursor to 


?"7@
!
# 

call the selection screen. Select the switch 



%2332


	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

#	

	
H
	#
$

 Move the cursor to the left or right item 

and touch the RTN button to switch to the 

 $ !
 %: 
 !5	 


independently by scrolling the touch sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

9G	
	
#

 To activate the link mixing, move the cursor 


?)<I@
!
# 

to switch to the data input mode. Select the 

ON mode by scrolling the touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to set the link mode 

and return to the cursor mode.

(Glider: Currently selected condition name)
126 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

;	
	
#	


$

?*


	@

1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting 


!

:

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

mode.

 %:

 	



 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

2. Repeat this procedure for each point.

?0	
$@

1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting 


!:
#

button to switch to the data input mode.

 %:

$ 	


sensor.

 %:!
	
&8$-9


:	$

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve 

position is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

2. Repeat this procedure for each point.

?+

	D
	
$@

 Move the cursor to the curve point setting 


!


D


the RTN button for one second.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 127

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

CAMBER MIX ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4-
!


This function adjusts the rate of camber 

operation for the wing camber (ailerons, camber 

flaps, brake flaps) in the negative and positive 

directions. The aileron, flap, and elevator rates 

can also be adjusted independently and attitude 

changes caused by camber operation can be 

corrected.

*Initial setting assigns camber operation to side lever LS.

 #
 $D 
  
 
4 $4 




 
:
7

!5	





 
	
4:!


can be made by changing the mixing rate 

$3

05			 

D 


	%?33@
	

%
 

%



 



*


cut switch

*


setting

%



:!


(Glider: Currently selected 

condition name)

"

?*%0,0<@
0


menu and access the setup screen 

shown below by touching the RTN 

button.

*The display screen is an example. The actual 

screen depends on the model type.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


$


:!


,



:!

128 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

AIL 3

(Chip Aileron)

AIL 4

(Chip Aileron)

AIL1

(Main Aileron)

AIL 2

(Main Aileron)

FLP 2

(Camber Flap)

FLP 1

(Camber Flap)

ELEVATOR

ELEVATOR 2

V-TAIL

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2

AILVATOR

FLP 3

(Brake Flap)

FLP 4

(Brake Flap)

Setting method



	"
	

 0


?%*#@
!

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

!
"


%*#!
 	


touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 



!


$


 When setting a switch, move the cursor to 


?"7@
!
# 

call the selection screen. Select the switch 



%2332


	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

2	

	
#

 0


?*++,)%A@
!

and touch the RTN button to switch to the 

$!
%:



by scrolling the touch sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&C-E

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

 When setting a cut switch, move the cursor 

 
 ?*8#3"7@ 
!   
 #

button to access the selection screen. Select 




%

2332
	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

(

	
H


 #
 
 
 :
  
	 



4H$4






 Move the cursor to the rate1 or rate2 

item and touch the RTN button to switch 

 
  $ !
 %: 
 


independently by scrolling the touch sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 129

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

ELE to CAMBER ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4-
!


This function is used when you want to mix the 





<

the flaps are lowered by up elevator, and lift is 

increased.

<3H	!5	 

D 		

%?33@
	

#
!5	
 
:


#
$







$


 
:


.


F
Z	7"
	


		"
	

	!#	!	
	


	


	!"
	"			


E

#	

	
H


 Move the cursor to the up or down mixing 

rate item for each servo and touch the RTN 

button to switch to the data input mode. 

%:


$

 	

the touch sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

Setting method



	"
	

 0


?%*#@
!

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

!
"


%*#!
 	


touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 



!


$


 When setting a switch, move the cursor to 


?"7@
!
# 

call the selection screen. Select the switch 



%2332


	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

(
#
	
#	,
	$

 0


?%.,@
!

hold the elevator stick to the desired position 

$$




#

button for one second to set the range. 

*The mixing does not work near neutral of the elevator stick.

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&C1CC

(Glider: Currently selected condition name)

"

?,),*%0,@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown below 

by touching the RTN button.

*The display screen is an example. 

The actual screen depends on the 

model type.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	

130 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2

V-TAIL

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2

AILVATOR

FLP 2

(Camber Flap)

FLP 1

(Camber Flap)

CMBFLP to ELE ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4

-
1H$!


When the camber/speed flaps are utilized, 

the aircraft might experience, a change in pitch. 

This mix compensates for such changes by 

incorporating elevator input.

 #
 

 
 $D 
  


:
 
$
 < 
 !5	 
 




4	

!5	
$©

05			 

D 


	%?33@
	

 ,  
          


:!


Setting method



	"
	

 0


?%*#@
!

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

!
"


%*#!
 	


touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 



!


$


 When setting a switch, move the cursor to 


?"7@
!
# 

call the selection screen. Select the switch 



%2332


	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

#	

	
H


 0


%#,1%#,-
!

and touch the RTN button to switch to the 

 $ !
 %: 
 !5	 


independently by scrolling the touch sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

"

?*0)
,),@
0
!


access the setup screen shown below by touching 

the RTN button.

* T h e d i s p l a y s c r e e n i s a n 

example. The actual screen 

depends on the model type.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


(Glider: Currently selected condition name)
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 131

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

BUTTERFLY ?*
$	!
$
@&.
4!&-
!


	&-
1H$!


This function is utilized to quickly slow the 

aircraft and reduce altitude by simultaneously 

raising the left and right ailerons and lowering the 


#


!
$

 Butterfly (Crow) produces an extremely 

	




the following: 

1. Slow the aircraft’s velocity. 

-


	$



the tendency to tip stall.

'*

!






		H
$



05			 

D 


	%?33@
	

 #
 $   
 
 $


reference point can be offset. 

#
$
$



$

 
:


#



 
:


*For a description of the setting method, see the aileron 

differential function.


H$




$

"

?8##,)A@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown 

below by touching the RTN button.

*The display screen is an example. The actual 

screen depends on the model type.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


(Currently selected condition name)

"
$


	

,
:!


%
DH$


:!

132 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

Setting method



	"
	

 0


?%*#@
!

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

!
"


%*#!
 	


touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 



!


$


 When setting a switch, move the cursor to 


?"7@
!
# 

call the selection screen. Select the switch 



%2332


	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

(

	
H


 Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or 

elevator rate item and touch the RTN button 


$!
%:


rate independently by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
 	
& 3-CC-CC ,
&

31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

	

	

	
	
H


$A 


Offset point 5
C 5



$

-3<
!

$ Settable Settable

13,$ Settable 5


* The range where mixing does not work close to the neutral 

position of the elevator stick can be adjusted. (Glider only)

*When offset is set, the curve is initialized.

(



		
H


 0


?",#@
!

hold the airbrake stick to the desired position 

and then touch the RTN button for one 

second to set the butterfly operational 

reference point. 

 <
&C$$



 %:!
	
&C1CC


	

	
#

 Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or 

elevator speed item and touch the RTN 

button to switch to the data input mode. 

 %:

 	



 <
&C

 %:!
	
&C-E!5!!


*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 

function and return to the cursor mode.

AIL 3

(Chip Aileron)

AIL 4

(Chip Aileron)

AIL1

(Main Aileron)

AIL 2

(Main Aileron)

FLP 2

(Camber Flap)

FLP 1

(Camber Flap)

ELEVATOR

ELEVATOR 2

V-TAIL

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2

AILVATOR

FLP 3

(Brake Flap)

FLP 4

(Brake Flap)
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 133

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

TRIM MIX ?*
$	!
$
@&.
4-
!


This function adjusts the trim offset rates of the 





#


!


$



As an example this function can be set up for 







and a slight amount of up elevator, and can be 

	




speed flaps reflexed slightly, and a bit of down 

elevator. 

To prevent sudden trim changes when switching 








"

?#<00<@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown 

below by touching the RTN button.

*The display screen is an example. The actual 

screen depends on the model type.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


smooth transition between the two conditions. It 

is also possible to program a cut switch which 

will turn off the delay.

Furthermore, you can set the auto switch, which 

will link the trim mix to a stick, switch, or dial. 

Additionally, the speed of the aileron, elevator, 





(

(Currently selected condition name)

*


setting

 %
4 $4 

elevators servo speed 

setting

%



  %   
     4     $  4    

elevators offset rate

 "     

selection
134 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

Setting method



	"
	

 0


?%*#@
!

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

!
"


%*#!
 	


touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 



!


$


 When setting a switch, move the cursor to 

the switch item and touch the RTN button 

to access the selection screen. Select the 



%

2332
	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

7	
	

	
H


 Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or 

elevator rate item and touch the RTN button 


$!
%:


rate independently by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&3-9C-9C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

2	

	
#

 0


?*++,)%A@
!

and touch the RTN button to switch to the 

$!
%:



by scrolling the touch sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&C-E

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the servo 

operation position is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

 When setting a cut switch, move the cursor 

 
 ?*8#3"7@ 
!   
 #

button to access the selection screen. Select 




%

2332
	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual. 


	

	
#

 Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or 

elevator speed item and touch the RTN 

button to switch to the data input mode. 

 %:

 	



 <
&C

 %:!
	
&C-E!5!!


*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 

function and return to the cursor mode.

	!"	



 When selecting an auto switch, move the 


?%8#3"7@
!


RTN button to access the selection screen. 

Select the switch and set its ON direction. 

%2332
	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

AIL 3

(Chip Aileron)

AIL 4

(Chip Aileron)

AIL1

(Main Aileron)

AIL 2

(Main Aileron)

FLP 2

(Camber Flap)

FLP 1

(Camber Flap)

ELEVATOR

ELEVATOR 2

V-TAIL

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2

AILVATOR

FLP 3

(Brake Flap)

FLP 4

(Brake Flap)
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 135

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

AIRBRAKE ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
4-
!


This function is used to increase the aircraft's 

drag and is useful for landing or diving, etc.

The preset elevators and flaps (camber flap, 

brake flap) offset amount can be activated by a 

switch.

The offset amount of the aileron, elevator, and 

flap servos can be adjusted as needed. Also the 

	






be adjusted. If the Auto Mode is activated, this 

will link the Airbrake to a stick, switch, or dial. A 

separate stick switch or dial can also be set as the 

ON/OFF switch.


#	


		&	
	"
	\

	



7
-
!
$





Offset rate:

 %<)&?3'93;9@4%<)-&?3'93;9@4,),&?9E@

Note: The input numerics are examples. Adjust the travel to 

match the aircraft.

Mode setting:

 %*#&?@

 "&?"73*@

 %8#3"7&?33@

"

?%<%I,@
0
!



the setup screen shown below by touching the 

RTN button.

*The display screen is an example. The 

actual screen depends on the model type.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


 %
4 $4 

elevators servo speed 

setting

%



  %   
     4     $  4    

elevators offset rate

 "     

selection
136 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

Setting method



	"
	

 0


?%*#@
!

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

!
"


%*#!
 	


touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 



!


$


 When setting a switch, move the cursor to 

the switch item and touch the RTN button 

to access the selection screen. Select the 



%

2332
	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

'
	

	
H


 Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or 

elevator rate item and touch the RTN button 


$!
%:


rate independently by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&3-9C-9C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.


	

	
#

 Move the cursor to the aileron, flap or 

elevator speed item and touch the RTN 

button to switch to the data input mode. 

 %:

 	



 <
&C

 %:!
	
&C-E!5!!


*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor 

mode.

	!"	



 When setting a auto switch, move the cursor 


?%8#3"7@
!
#

button to access the selection screen. Select 




%

2332
	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

AIL 3

(Chip Aileron)

AIL 4

(Chip Aileron)

AIL1

(Main Aileron)

AIL 2

(Main Aileron)

FLP 2

(Camber Flap)

FLP 1

(Camber Flap)

ELEVATOR

ELEVATOR 2

V-TAIL

ELEVATOR ELEVATOR 2

AILVATOR

FLP 3

(Brake Flap)

FLP 4

(Brake Flap)
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 137

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

GYRO ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4	



This function is used when a GYA Series gyro 

is used to stabilize the aircraft's attitude. The 

sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/

AVCS mode) can be changed via a switch.

 #

 
 
 1D
 -D
 '  


switched.

 8$  ' 5
 .D. -D. '  


simultaneously controlled.

Note: This setting does not assign a sensitivity 

channel. To do so, use the Linkage menu 

prior to assigning the sensitivity channel 

(Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3), be sure to select an 

unused channel.

 Set the [Control] and [Trim] settings other than 

Function to [--].

#
$
!
%*"D

and sensitivity of the three axis 

.D.-D.' 



"

?.A@
0
!


access the setup screen shown below 

by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


(Active rate # display)

 . $


selection

 %*#D</

 "



    
 1 3 '   
   $

screen selection

?
1
$

@

?
-
$

@

?
'
$

@

Setting method

*Prior to using the Function menu in the Linkage menu to 

assign the sensitivity channel (Gyro/Gyro2/Gyro3) select an 

unused channel.

 Set [Control] and [Trim] other than function to [--].

(

*;	
	

	



 Move the cursor to the setup screen selection 

item and touch the RTN button to switch 

to the data input mode. Select the setup 

screen # by scrolling the touch sensor. 

 Touch the RTN button to change the setup 

screen and return to the cursor mode.



	"
	

 0


?</@
!

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

!
"


%*#!
 	


touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 

function and return to the cursor mode.
138 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

 When setting a rate selection switch, move 

the cursor to the switch item and touch the 

RTN button to access the selection screen. 

Select the switch and set its ON direction. 

%2332
	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

,	
	



 Move the cursor to the gyro type selection 

item and touch the RTN button to switch to 

the data input mode. Select the gyro type 

by scrolling the touch sensor. 

 ?.A@&7
 .A%	


 ?0@&7
	!
	


 .A%	


 Touch the RTN button to change the gyro 

type and return to the cursor mode.

*When a Futaba GYA gyro is used and [GY] type is selected, 

the sensitivity set value is directly read in both the AVCS 

and NORM modes.

'

	
	

	,X	#$

 Move the cursor to the operation mode 

selection item and touch the RTN button 

to switch to the data input mode. Select 

the operation mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

 ?%*"@&%*"!


 ?0@&!!


 Touch the RTN button to change the 

operation mode and return to the cursor 

mode.


	
#

 Move the cursor to the sensitivity icon and 

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

input mode. 

 %:

 	


sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&C1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the 

sensitivity is reset to the initial value.)

 Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor 

mode.



$	
#	"

	
	#	
	,X+V	
	,X+*	M$

7	$
&%
-
!

	





"
.1.A%;'1%<)&*/94.-.A%;'1,),&*/E4.'.A%;'C8+&*/B


!

)	
!



1?@?.A@?",@?0@?FC@?0@?FC@?0@?FC@

 
-?</@

 
'?@?.A@?",@?%*"@?FC@?%*"@?FC@?%*"@?FC@

*Set so that Rate 1 is turned on at the back position of switch E and Rate 3 is turned ON at the front 

position. Since switch E is turned OFF at the center, Rate 2 remains [INH].

R7008SB

Rudder servo

Elevator servo

GYA430

GYA431

GYA431

Aileron servo

S.BUS/S.BUS2 port


:KHQD6%86SRUWLVXVHG

56%&+0RGHLVVHWWR

0RGH%>'@

GAIN 0%

AVCS

NORMAL

When AVCS is used we 

recommend that the 

sensitivity CH be set to 

the 3-position.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 139

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

ELEVATOR

(RUDDER 2) RUDDER

(ELEVATOR 2)

V-TAIL ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
43

This function enables adjustments for left and 

right rudder angle changes during elevator and 

rudder operation of a V-tail airplane.

V-tail is when two servos are used together to 

control rudder movement as elevators. In addition 

to each elevator side moving up and down together, 

each side moves in opposite directions when moving 

as rudders. On a V-tail, this is also known as a 

Ruddervator, as they serve the same purpose.




 L e f t a n d r i g h t t r a v e l 

  :    ! 
           
 

operation

,


 8$
:!


elevator operation

"

?3#%<)@
0
!


access the setup screen shown below 

by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


Setting method

	7

	
H


 Move the cursor to the item you want to 

:
# 

the data input mode.

 %:

 	



 <
&9C

 %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor 

mode.

*If the mixing direction is reversed, adjustments can be made 

by changing the mixing rate polarity (+ or -).

*If a large value of travel is specified, when the sticks are 

moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run out of 

travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.
140 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

ELEVATOR

ELEVATOR 2 (AILERON 5) (AILERON 6)

AILEVATOR ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4%


 (Effective only when 2 servos used at the elevators)

This function improves the performance of the roll 

axis by operating the elevators as ailerons.

Ailevator is where each elevator in a standard 

(conventional) or v-tail moves independently, like 

ailerons on a wing. In addition to each elevator side 

moving up and down together, each side moves in 

opposite directions when moving as an Ailevator. On 

a V-tail, this is also known as a Ruddervator, as they 

can serve the same purpose. Typically, both Ailevator 

and ailerons are coupled together to maximize roll 

performance, especially on larger wingspan planes.


&"

%

0
#$

0


#$


#	

$
*



!


%


7







as ailerons, aileron travel of 

the left and right elevators 

 
:


,


 #
 $   
  

elevators when the elevator stick 

is moved can be individually 

:


"

?%<),%#@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown 

below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


Setting method

	7

	
H


 Move the cursor to the item you want to 

:
# 

the data input mode.

 %:

 	



 <
&,),&1CC4%<)&C

 %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor 

mode.

*If the mixing direction is reversed, adjustments can be made 

by changing the mixing rate polarity (+ or -).

*If a large value of travel is specified, when the sticks are 

moved at the same time, the controls may bind or run out of 

travel. Decrease the travel until no binding occurs.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 141

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

RUDDER 1

Winglet ( ) at Flying wing

RUDDER 2

Winglet ( ) at Flying wing

WINGLET ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4		

This function adjusts the left and right rudder 

angles of airplanes with winglets.

Winglets are used to improve the efficiency of 

aircraft by lowering the lift-induced drag caused by 

wingtip vortices. The winglet is a vertical or angled 

extension located at the tip of each wing.

 Winglets work by increasing the effective aspect 

ratio wing without adding greatly to the structural 

stress and hence necessary weight of its structure 

- an extension of wing span would also permit 

lowering of induced drag, though it would cause 

parasitic drag and would require boosting the 

strength of the wing and hence its weight. There 

would come a point at which no overall useful 

gains would be made. A winglet helps to solve this 

by effectively increasing the aspect ratio without 

adding to the span of the wing.


1D-

#

	
$


 
:


"

?7<.),#@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown 

below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


Setting method

	7

	
H


 Move the cursor to the item you want to 

:
# 

the data input mode.

 %:

 	



 <
&1CC

 %:!
	
&31-C1-C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor 

mode.

*If the mixing direction is reversed, change the mixing rate 

polarity (+ or -).
142 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

MOTOR ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
D	
4	



This function lets you set the speed when the 

motor of an F5B or other EP glider is started via 

a switch. The operation speed can be set for two 

ranges, slow speed flight and high speed flight 

(Speed 1/Speed 2). This function can also be 

operated as a safety function by programming it to 

a switch.

#
<

$
	$



 
:

$

-	
"$

1D

"$

-

#
  



-	
 



!"$

1"$

-

#
$
$

 




$
/

4$
 



$

 
	
 




$
>
7





!
$
4

%*#D</
!?</@




?@

#
!

 "73..
&

<
	7
		



!4>	


the Linkage menu.

<
0
#$



%$
4
0#

	
!</

assigned to another channel, the changes from 

the throttle channel to the motor channel are 

enabled. 

Note: Initial setting does not assign a motor 

channel according to the model type. Prior to 



	



channel. Then, use the Function menu of the 

Linkage menu.

 Set [Control] to the switch you want to use 

and [Trim] to [--].

Note: When using this function, always check 

the initial operation with the propeller 

removed. "

?0#@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown 

below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


Setting method

	

	"
	

 When using this function, move the cursor to 


?%*#D</@
!
# 

to switch to the data input mode. Select the 

?%*#@ 	



the RTN button.

 7


	
D4!



cursor to the switch item and touch the RTN 

button to access the selection screen. Select 




%

2332
	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

				
#

 0


?0#@
!

and touch the RTN button for one second 



!".4



!$
#


direction of the motor switch is memorized. 

#


	$$


changes.

Note:


	



	



set the speed. When you want to reset the 

motor OFF direction, also reset the speed.

  	

  

    

combination with F/S.

	
!

	


Reverse function to match the ESC used.

#

!


<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 143

Setting method

	

	"
		

	

 When using motor speed function, move the 


?</@
!
#

button to switch to the data input mode. 

"


?%*#@ 	



and touch the RTN button.

	#	"
	
	
!

	"
	M	
#


 0


?"
,,+1£-@
!

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

input mode.

 %:
 $ 	


touch sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor 

mode.

	'

	

	
H


 0


?<@?8#@


!
# 

switch to the data input mode.

 %:
$
$




by scrolling the touch sensor. 

 <
&C

 %:!
	
&C-E

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 Touch the RTN button to return to the cursor 

mode.

	
@(

	"
	
	
	



 0


?,#<0,@
!

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

input mode. 

 "


?%*#@ 	



and touch the RTN button to set the one time 

operation.

* When you want to reset one time operation, set the ACT/

INH item to [INH] and then reset it to [ON].

0

current position


	!"	

7
 
4 
 2"#%# "72  


!6
	
!#


!

!"72"#%#

"72

!
#
!

	


!"7


<2"#%#"72
 


main SW is still ON, the motor remains ON.

[START SW function example]

 When the throttle (motor) stick is assigned as the "START SW", 

and the low throttle position of the throttle curve is adjusted, the 

motor starts operating with the initial stick movement. The motor 

will not cease functionality even if the stick position is returned to 

it's lowest setting.

7	

	@	
	
#			'&&

<

!

	



Motor function, it is possible to turn the 

motor off with the trim lever. To maintain 

!$ 
$	
#1;".D"4


!
	:

$

/

4		





position accordingly in the programming of 

the transmitter.

*Data Reset will return the trim setting to the off position.



	
	"
	
		"
		'&&	
#

7

0#
			
4

you will note the presence of the small cursor 



0#$#

:  0#  $4 
 


throttle stick to move the cursor accordingly. 

When satisfied with this position, press and 

hold the RTN button on the transmitter.

*The larger cursor is used to indicate the output of the motor 


7




mixing which may be active.

7"
	
	

7
2*8,2 
4


curve screen opens. 

*When a throttle function is assigned to either channel, the 

"CURVE" button is not displayed because a throttle curve 

does not function as a motor curve.

D

144 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

RUD to ELE ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
4	



This function is used when you want to mix 

elevator operation with rudder operation. It is used 

to correct undesirable tendencies when rudder is 

applied in rolling maneuvers such as, knife edge 



05			 

D 


	%?33@
	

)!5	 

&)!5
!5


 "

 ?8+  ,),@  
 0


menu and access the setup screen 

shown below by touching the RTN 

button.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


Setting method



	"
	

 0


?%*#@
!

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

!
"


%*#!
 	


touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to activate the 



!


$


 When selecting a switch, move the cursor to 


?"7@
!
# 

call the selection screen. Select the switch 



%2332


	

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

;	
	
#	


$

?*


	@

1. Move the cursor to the curve rate setting 


!

:

the RTN button to switch to the data input 

mode.

 %:

 	



 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

2. Repeat this procedure for each point.

?0	
$@

1. Move the cursor to the curve point setting 


!:
#

button to switch to the data input mode.

 %:

$ 	


sensor.

 %:!
	
&8$-9


:	$

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the curve 

position is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.

2. Repeat this procedure for each point.

?+

	D
	
$@

 Move the cursor to the curve point setting 


!


D


the RTN button for one second.

9G	
	
#

 When selecting the link mixing, move the 


?)<I@
!
#

button to switch to the data input mode. 

Select the ON mode by scrolling the touch 

sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 Touch the RTN button to set the link mode 

and return to the cursor mode.
<Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)> 145

"


!


and return to the Model 

menu by touching the

RTN button. Or the

HOME/EXIT b u t t o n i s 

pushed.

<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

SNAP ROLL ?*
$	!
$
@&%$
4	



This function selects the switch and rate 

adjustment of ailerons, elevators, and rudder when 

a snap roll is performed.

$
 

	D$4

	D4
D$4
D

$
!
&7
?0
@!



4


"$
D 


!
<$ 





switch was switched to the direction in which you 

$7
?"	
@!



4

the snap roll in each direction can be executed 

by means of independent switches and positions.

 % 
   
 
  $

 




   
 $  

example, the landing gear is lowered, even if 

the switch is turned on accidentally the snap roll 

would not be executed. The snap roll switch is 







(Example) Setting example for F3A

0
&?0
@

"
"7&?".@"
!



0
"7&?"/@0
5
	

$

+

&

*The snap roll up side left and right and down side left and right 

direction switches are selected here.

	D8$&?"+@

	D+&?"+@

)
D8$&?"%@

)
D+&?"%@

 0
D	
 !


selection

"

?"%
))@
0
!


and access the setup screen shown 

below by touching the RTN button.

Scrolling

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


+


146 <Model Menu (Airplane/Glider Functions)>

Setting method



@#
	
	



 0


?0+,@
!

touch the RTN button to switch to the data 

input mode. Select the master or single 

mode by scrolling the touch sensor. 

*The display blinks.

 ?0%"#,@&0
!


 ?"<.),@&"	
!


 Touch the RTN button to select the mode 

and return to the cursor mode.

 When setting a master switch, move the 


?0%"#,3"7@
!

the RTN button to access the selection 

screen. Select the switch and set its ON 

direction.

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

 When setting a safety switch, move the 


?"%,#A3"7@
!


RTN button to access the selection screen. 

Select the switch and set its ON direction.


	!"	



 Move the cursor to the direction switch item 

and touch the RTN button to access the 

selection screen. Select the switch and set its 

ON direction.

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 

description at the back of this manual.

(

	
H


 Move the cursor to the aileron, elevator or 

rudder item for each direction and touch the 

RTN button to switch to the data input mode. 

%:


$

 	

the touch sensor. 

 <
&+
$

$
$




 %:!
	
&319C19C

*When the RTN button is touched for one second, the rate is 

reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!


and return to the cursor mode.
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 147

"


!




0


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

MODEL MENU (HELICOPTER)

This section contains information on the 

commands that apply to helicopters only. For 

instructions on Airplanes and Sailplanes, refer to 

the sections pertaining to those aircraft.

Use the Model Type function in the Linkage 

Menu to select the swash type matched to the 

respective aircraft.

Also, activate/deactivate flight conditions 

according to your model. To do so, access at the 

Condition Select screen prior to adjusting the 



#^


used)

The Dual Rate function and other functions 











+
	

these respective sections for information on how to 

do so.

Model Menu functions (helicopter) list

PIT CURVE:(		

THR CURVE:7

(		

THR HOLD: Moves the throttle to idle during autorotation

SWASH MIX:&
		

THROTTLE MIX: Compensates for power loss when cyclic applied

PIT to NEEDLE:(		

PIT to RUD: Compensates torque changes from pitch angle inputs

GYRO: Used to switch gyro sensitivity

GOVERNOR:^\+[	9


%

0
!
 
 

	
# 

!




4


"	

0	

#
5$	


 "

 
  

  
  


  
   
   $     
 
   

	
# 
148 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>

"


!




0


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

PIT CURVE/PIT TRIM

Pitch Curve

This function adjusts the pitch operation curve 

for each flight condition to optmize the model's 

performance in relationship to the throttle stick position.



	




value at the corresponding points.

Normal curve adjustment








^	7\

Curve (Normal) function and adjust the curve so that up/






Idle up curve adjustment

*For the high side pitch curve, set the maximum pitch 

so that it does not overload the engine. For the low side 

pitch curve, create curves matched to loop, roll, 3D, and 

other purposes and use the idle up curves according to the 

performance.

Throttle hold curve adjustment

*The throttle hold curve is used when executing auto 

rotations.

Operation precautions

Warning

When actually starting the engine and flying, 

always set the idle up condition switch to OFF 

and start the engine at idle.

"

?
<#*8,@
0
!





$

 
 	


# 



$

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


(Currently selected condition name)

10



$
	


!


D



# 



"	
		

 0

*
A
#

 
$!


"


$
  

	


#

 "


?A,"@
#

 



 
$

Setting method

;	
	
#

?*


	@

10





	


!:
#

 
$!


 %:

 	



 <
&
1&31CC4
-&39C4
'&C4
;&

9C4
9&1CC

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

<\7E	


reset to the initial value.

 #
# 

:!




!


-
$
  $

  
 $ 





?0	
$@

10



$
	


!:
#

 
$!


 %:

$ 	





 <
&
1&C4
-&-94
'&9C4
;&

E94
9&1CC

 %:!
	
&8$-9


:	$

<\7E	

position is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!




!


-
$
  $

  
 $ 





?+

	D
	
$@

*The graph display includes the pitch 

trim operation.
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 149

Normal Curve Idle-up 1 Curve Idle-up 2 Curve Hold Curve

'(%)*+	,

7



entering the pitch rate at low, center, and high side (3 

points or 5 points) at each condition. 

When actually creating a curve, input the rate 

#	
$

Curve setting examples

Pitch Trim (Hovering pitch, high pitch, low pitch)

?/
	$!
	@

Hovering pitch trim

7+	

near the hovering point. Normally, it is used with 

7


	











conditions. Adjust the hovering pitch so that 


7	


77	

for more precise operation.

Setting method

"

%*#?@
	

"


:!
 

 "


5!$
&)+
	

#
!$
!
0
&*#0D

0 





CTRM mode:05!!!	



 

  

 ! $



!!



NORM mode:     !       !   $      
 

!
!
!$
#
	


	!


	$

 
 :
  		 





 #
 ! 
  
 :
  


$

 
	


#!:!
	
	

	

 7

!
!4!

 






150 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>

?)D/	$!
	@

High Pitch/Low Pitch Trim

+6J+7

high side and low side trim function.

Setting method

"

%*#

"


:!
 

 "


5!$
&)"	
4"




 #
 ! 
  
 :
  


$

 
	


#!	

!






<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 151

"


!




0


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

THR CURVE/THROTTLE HOVER TRIM

Throttle Curve

Throttle curve function adjusts the throttle 

operation curve for each condition to optimize the 

engine speed to throttle stick movement.

77	

near the hovering point. Normally, use it with 

hovering conditions. Changes in rotor speed 

accompanying changes in the temperature, 


 
  	  
 

trimmed. Adjust the throttle so that rotor rotation is 


[


	
+

function.

"

?#/*8,@
0
!





$

 
 

	
# 

*The graph display includes the throttle 

hover trim operation.

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


(Currently selected condition name)



 #

$ 
$

Normal curve adjustment

E
  
 
 
   


hovering. Use it along with the normal pitch curve and 

adjust so that up/down control results in a constant engine 

speed.

Idle up curve adjustment

*Set a idle up curve that maintains a constant speed at all 

times, even during operation which reduces the pitch 

	&




3D, or other purposes and the idle up curve according to 

the performance.

Operation precautions

Warning

When actually starting the engine and flying, 

always set the idle up condition switch to OFF 

and start the engine at the idle.

?+

	D
	
$@

10



$
	


!


D



# 



7"
	
		

 0
 
 *
A 
!   
 #

 
$!


"


$
  

	


#

 "


?A,"@
#

 

Setting method

;	
	
#

?*


	@

10





	


!:
#

 
$!


 %:

 	



 <
&
1&C4
-&-94
'&9C4
;&E94


9&1CC

 %:!
	
&C1CC

<\7E	


reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!




!


-
$
  $

  
 $ 





?0	
$@

10



$
	


!:
#

 
$!


 %:

$ 	





 <
&
1&C4
-&-94
'&9C4
;&

E94
9&1CC

 %:!
	
&8$-9


:	$

<\7E	

position is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!




!


-
$
$


$


152 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>

Normal Curve Idle-up 1 Curve Idle-up 2 Curve

)*+	,

7



the data of the 5 points 0% (low side), 25%, 

50% (center), 75%, 100% (high) side for each 

condition. When actually creating a curve, enter the 



#	

value).

Curve setting examples

Throttle Hover trim

Setting method

"

%*#?@
	

"


:!
 

 "


5!$
&+
	

#
!$
!
0
&*#0D

0 





CTRM mode: 05!! 
  	



 

  

 ! $



!!



NORM mode: ! ! 

!
!
!$


 #
 ! 
  
 :
  


$

 



#!:!
	
	

	

 7!

4
!








?#

!
	@
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 153

Throttle limiter function

Setting method

*Set at the 3rd page of the throttle curve screen.



	"
	E

1"

%*#
# 

-"
$%*# 	





#
$ 

 </&< 

 %*#&%


' ,
 
 

  	 
 #

 

'F@'&&	!"	
#

1"

"7
# 

-#
/D7",#

$
"






# 

This function limits the high range of the throttle 





&
(


=#"	
	

#	
#
	
#

1"

/<./
# 

- %: 
 	 
 $
	 	
 

	



*A gauge is displayed at the left side of the graph.

'#
# 


!


9!	
	

#	
#
	
#

1"

)7
# 

- %: 
  
 $
	 	
 

	



*A gauge is displayed at the left side of the graph.

'#
# 


!


9
	

#	
#
	
H
		

setting

1"

*#)
# 

-#
/D7",#

$
"






# 

7




dotted line on the graph.

*When limiter operating range adjustment control is NULL, 

the throttle limiter function is not performed.

2"
##	"
		

	

1"

*,#,
# 

1
*,#,	
!</¦


$§

- 7
 
 *,#, 
  	
4 



$


*#)

 
:


<&_E7_\E


LOW intermediate value.

<&_E7_\
	E




CENTER rate is set to the LOW intermediate value.

7&_E7_\

3
J=<

?#
!

	@

When "CTRL" is set as a "RS" side slider. 

The state of full high of a throttle stick. 

“RS”Position Throttle

Position

Full

Restriction Restriction Restriction

Slow

Full

Slow

Full

Slow

In "INH", the halfway

 point of "HIGH" and

 "LOW".

HIGH

LOW

CENTER

6%
154 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>

"


!




0


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

THR HOLD

This function sets the throttle cut position for 

auto rotation. The throttle servo operating speed 



(#%$

Note: Initially, this setting does not assign the 

throttle hold switch. Prior to adjusting the 

parameters for the throttle hold, we suggest 

designating a throttle hold switch. To do so, 

access the Condition menu within the Model 

menu options.

"
$



Setting method

=		!"	

	

 8

*

!

0


!
	


 "


5!$
&".

=		
H


 0


$
!


# 


$!


 %:

 	



 <
&1E

 %:!
	
&C9C

(






<\7E	


reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!




!



	

	
#

 0



$


!


# 


$!


 %:

 	



 <
&C

 %:!
	
&C-E!5!!


<\7E	


reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 



!


"

?#//)+@
0
!





$



 
 	
# 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


/$
	

/$

*
$

Operation precautions

Warning

When actually starting the engine and flying, 

always set the idle up condition switch to OFF 

and start the engine at idle.
<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 155

"


!




0


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

SWASH MIX

The swash mix function is used to correct the 

swash plate in the aileron (roll) direction and 

elevator (cyclic pitch) corresponding to each 

operation of each condition.

This function allows the independent rate 

adjustments for the ailerons, elevator and pitch.

Example of use

%
5!$
4
!5	



 






%<),),4




 <


$

	

	4


-
$


	
$

4




!


#
 :	





 
4:

1


Setting method



	"
	#

 7
	4!




?%*#@
!
# 


$!


 "


%*#!
 	





7

!

 #
# 

!5	

 
  
  !
  

$


 ?"

@

 7
??33@@
4
!5	


$

 !





	


 7

	?@D?@4!




?"7@
!
#

 





"



$

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 



!	



#	

	
H


 0


!5	

!



# 


$!
%:




$

 	





 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

<\7E	


reset to the initial value.

 #
# 

:!




!


7	
	'F@'&&	
#

 7
		
!!
4!




?#<0@
!
#

 
$!


 "

D 	



7

!

 #
# 	

!

!
 D  
  
 

!


*When mixing includes master side trim, select [ON] and 

when mixing does not include master trim, select [OFF].

"

?"7%"/0<@
0
!





$



 
 	
# 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


   H

(Currently selected condition name)

*


156 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>

"


!




0


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

THROTTLE MIX

This function corrects slowing of engine speed 








or elevator operation. The method of applying 

clockwise or counterclockwise torque when 





Setting example

%<)#/!5	

	


	

06

$	




$
,	

3$

	

 
:

$




	


$	


1-

 "

 ?#/##), 0<@  
 0
 !
 




$

 
 	


# 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


(Currently selected condition name)

Setting method



	"
	#

 7
	4!




?%*#@
!
# 


$!


 "


%*#!
 	





7

!

 #
# 

!5	

 
  
  !
  

$


 ?"

@

 7
??33@@
4
!5	


$

 !





	


 7

	?@D?@4!




?"7@
!
#

 




"



$

*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 



!	



#	

	
H


 0


!5	

!



# 


$!
%:




$

 	





 <
&C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

<\7E	


reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!




!


'

	
	
#

 0


?0+,@
!


# 


$!


 "


$
!
 	





7

!

 *#0!
:*






 )<!
&*

!$

	


 # 
 #   	
 


$
!




!


*


<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 157

"


!




0


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

PIT to RUD mixing (Revolution mixing)

Use this mix when you want to suppress the 







speed changes during pitch operation. Adjust so 

that the nose does not move in the rudder direction.

<Normal condition mixing curve>

 #
!5	

 



	!



      
 $



4
$$
$


4


$!

!5	




4!


	  
 : 
 


$

1%:!
 



	

 
$


!



!


!#
:
$



  
 
$
 
! 










-#
	
! 		!


	

 
$
! 		!
	


!


!:
$
















Note: When a GY Series or other heading hold 

gyro is used, since correction is performed by 

the gyro, this mix is not utilized. If this function 

is used when the gyro operation mode is the 

AVCS mode, the neutral position will change.

<Idle up condition mixing curve>

 "

!5	





	3$

H		
%:





"

?
<#8+@
0
!





$

 
 	


# 

(Currently selected condition name)

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


Setting method



	"
	#

 7
	4!




?%*#@
!
# 


$!


 "


%*#!
 	





7

!

 #
# 

!5	

 
  
  !
  

$


;	
	
#

 0





	


!:
#

 
$!


 %:

 	



 <
&
1
9&C

 %:!
	
&31CC1CC

<\7E	


reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 

:!




!


 
$
$


$

"	
		

 0

*
A
!


# 
$!


"


$
  

	


#

 "


?A,"@
#

 
158 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>

"


!




0


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

GYRO mixing

This function used to adjust gyro sensitivity. 

The sensitivity and operation mode (Normal mode/

&%$
	


7





condition or the switch. (5 sensitivities)

&
@
8
#&3~`qB$

"

?.A@
0
!





$

 
 	
#

 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


Note: When using the [Gyro2]/[Gyro3] function, 

assign [Gyro2]/[Gyro3] to any channel on the 

function screen.

 Always set to [--] both (Control) and (Trim) for 

the [Gyro] function at the Function menu in 

the Linkage menu.

(Currently selected condition name)

0


&

 ?%*"@D?0@

.$


&

 ?.A@D?0@

"
$





&
	


	
	

.
:!


*D"



#

 


	
 	


"1 

*When the rate switching setting of 



%

conditions are not displayed.

#


 
	
 $
	




 

*When the rate switching setting of all the gyros is 

&=E'




7

.A 


4


 .A 

 
	 



$$

<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 159

Setting method

,	
	



 0


	$





!
# 


$!
"


	$


 	



 ?.A@&7
 .A	


 ?0@&7

 .A	




 #
# 	

	

$


!


<


3~

¤3~¥






&%

and NORM modes.

'

	
	

	,X	#$

 0
 
   
 $
 !





!
# 


$!
"




$
!
 	





 ?%*"@&%*"!


 ?0@&!!


 # 
 #   	
 


$
!




!



	
#

 0




!


# 
$

!


 %:

 	





 <
&BC

 %:!
	
&C1CC

<  \7E    	   

sensitivity is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 



!


&
	#	?(	
#

 0


?33@
!


 #   
 
 





"




*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 



!	



 0




!


# 
$

!


 %:
!
 	





 <
&C

 %:!
	
&3-C-C

<  \7E    	   

sensitivity is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 



!


A9(
	#	#
		"
#
	!"	


	!"	&$	


		E	

.

4	



	



/  	
  
  
 !






1 "

 ?.A@  
 0
 !
 




$

 
 

	
# 

- 0
 
   
 ?*+@ 
!


# 







"


?"7@#


# 

!


'¢! 

$


<



¢1!
?33@

#$


;?"@
 ?/D7",),*#@


$


9?#A
,.A@?%#,@
2¢1«"

$2

$

F<
$2¢-20




?¢1@ 
!   
 #  







"


?¢-@

#
# 



!


SF : Top = #1

● #
! 


"7

160 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>

E0


?33@
!


# 

B?"@
 ?/D7",),*#@


 !

# 

G?#A
,.A@?%#,@
2¢-«"

 !2

$

	@
	@



performed.

&	
	

SF : Bottom = #2

● #
! 


"7

<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 161

"


!




0


!
 	


RTN   


HOME/EXIT        

$


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

GOVERNOR mixing

<


35,63~`B,6&3~`qB

	\+[

of the helicopter's rotor head. The rotor head speed 





7


&`#
$

*When using an independent governor [ON]/[OFF] switch, 

connect the AUX([ON]/[OFF]) connector of the governor to 

&L
&L#3D$


menu of the Linkage Menu.

Note: Always set (Control) and (Trim) to [--] 

for [Governor] of the Function menu of the 

Linkage menu.

"

?.,@
0
!





$

 
 	
#

 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


#
5$	


(Currently selected condition name)

8$

&

 ?@D?$!@

"
$





%*#D</&</
	


	
	


0:!


*D"



Setting method



	"
	#

 7
	4!




?</@
!
# 


$!


 "


%*#!
 	





7

!

 #
# 

!5	

 
  
  !
  

$


7
 
 .
  	
! 



 
</




%*# 
4 
 
$ !
  


$
    $ 
  
 



$	


*When the function is set ON/OFF at the governor setup 

screen, the governor rpm setting channel end point servo 

travel and limit point are now initialized.

<
	E&7#=E$


initialized to 100 and the limit point is initialized to 155.

<

E



servo travel is initialized to 100 and the limit point is 

initialized to 135.

8

"
#

A,"

$



$


$







# >!


!


(	
H


 0




!


# 
$

!


 %:
$! 	



 <
&9C19CC$!

 %:!
 	
& 4 C11C 4

ECC'9CC$!

<  \7E    	   

sensitivity is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 



!


)	
	



 0


8<#
!


# 
$

!
"


 	





 # 
 #   	
 


$
!




!

162 <Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)>


	
	



<¤¥







* There is no change in the transmitter output even when the 

£[='_£
&

	


the governor.

3		7,0%3

necessary to change the settings on the governor for the low 

side 700 rpm mode.

7

0+,
.


6

!
!
	
4
	



3



The chart below indicates the mode percentage and 

the corresponding RPM.

MODE 0% 50% 100% 110%

1000-2000rpm 1000rpm 1500rpm 2000rpm 2100rpm

1000-2500rpm 1000rpm 1500rpm 2500rpm 2700rpm

1000-3500rpm 1000rpm 1500rpm 3500rpm 3900rpm

700-2000rpm 700rpm 1500rpm 2000rpm 2100rpm

700-2500rpm 700rpm 1500rpm 2500rpm 2700rpm

700-3500rpm 700rpm 1500rpm 3500rpm 3900rpm

&
	#	?(	
#

 0


?33@
!


 #   
 
 





"




*For a description of the switch selection method, see the 



!	



 0




!


# 
$

!


 %:
!
 	





 <
&CC$!

 %:!
	
&3-C-C3-CC-CC$!

<  \7E    	   

sensitivity is reset to the initial value.)

 #
# 



!


<EXAMPLE>RPM rate is changed with a 

!"	&$	


		E	

.

4 
0 
  

 

	



/  	
  
  
 !






1"

?.,@
0
!





$

 


 	
# 

- 0
 
   
 ?*+@ 
!


# 







"


?"7@#


# 

!


%?</@
?%*#@

'¢! 

$


<



¢1!
?33@

#$


;?"@
 ?/D7",),*#@


$


9?0+,@?%#,@
2¢1«"

$2

$

F<
$2¢-20




?¢1@
!
# 







"




?¢-@#
# 



!
%?</@
?%*#@

SF : Top = #1 ● #
! 


"7

<Functions of Model Menu (Helicopter Functions)> 163

E0


?33@
!


# 

B?"@
 ?/D7",),*#@


 !

# 

G?0+,@?%#,@
2¢-«"

 !2

$

	 @     @ 
 
 
 

performed.

&	
	

SF : Bottom = #2

● #
! 


"7

164 <Appendix>

"


!




!




 	


RTN   HOME/

EXIT $


<SensorTouchTM>

RETURN

TIMER ST1/ST2 #!

	

The Timer function may be set for any desired 

time, i.e. engine run time, specified times for 

competitions, etc. Two independent timers are 

provided for your use. The timers are stored 

independently with each model, meaning that 

when you switch between model setups, the timer 

associated with the new model is brought up 

automatically.

The timers may be set to start and stop from the 

motion of any switch or stick. You may set the ON and 

OFF directions freely. Each timer has a capacity of up 

to 59 minutes 59 seconds.

Each timer may be set for count-down (DOWN 

mode) or count up (UP mode) operation with a 

target time or for count up to 99 hours 59 minutes 

(HOUR mode). 

If a target time is set and the timer reaches the set 

time, a buzzer sound for each count is generated.

Countdown timers sound one short beep during 

the last twenty seconds and two short beeps during 

the last ten seconds before reaching the target, then 

a long tone at the target time, and continue counting 

with displaying a minus (-) sign. Count-up timers 

also beep the last twenty and ten seconds, beep the 

target time, and keep counting upwards until shut 

down.

A mode which sounds an alarm each minute of 

the time remaining up to the timer alarm time can 

be selected.

The HOUR mode is convenient when used in 

engine maintenance period and other long-term 

measurements.

* When the HOUR mode is set, "xx (hour): xx (minute)" 

is displayed on the count time display. Seconds are not 

displayed.

* When the HOUR mode is set, ":" blinks each second during 

timer operation.

* When the HOUR mode is set, the alarm function is 

inhibited.

"

"#1"#-
!




 
 
$ 

  
 

	
# 

"	

0	

"

	!


%:	


TYPE 1

TYPE 2

TYPE 3

TYPE 4

"Vibes" type

If the following types are selected, the 

transmitter will vibrate during the warning.
<Appendix> 165

Timer setting

)	
@!	
	
#

 0


?0+,@
!


# 


$!


 "


!
 	




# 

 ?8
@&8$!


 ?+7@&+!


 ?/8@&/!
!


7
	
	
#

 0


?%)%0@
!


# 


$!


 "

!
 	



 ?CC@&?CC@&?!@&?
@

 #
# 

:!




!


!"	
#

 0



!



4


$



 	
# "







[For a detailed description of the setting method, see [Switch 

Setting Method] located on the next page.]

 ?"#%#@&"

 ?"#
@&"$

 ?,",#@&




	
#

 0


?0,0A@
!


# 


$!


 "


!
 	




# 

 ?@&0
!

 ?@&0



!






$


!


	
	!""		
	

	

"	
	


	
	


E

 *	


		
22 

22 

22&%!
!

!



$
 ! !
  *


!


22&%!
!

!



!	$
!!


7
	



 #!
"#1"#-

D$$
 

$
3


D$

 #

!
4$


$
3






4!


?,",#@

$
!





# 
166 <Appendix>

The various functions used in the T14SG can 

be activated by a switch. For the purposes of this 

manual, a stick position, VR position, etc. shall be 

commonly referred to as a switch in all cases. That 

"




5!$


Q"
	!"		




When switch was selected, ON/OFF position 

setting is also performed.

*The ON/OFF setting state of each position is displayed.

17
	

D


	4


!




# 


$!
"
D

$ 	



*ON/OFF display blinks.

-7

# 
4
D

 
	  	
 # 
 "1

 $
	


'#

$


	

4!




?D@
$





# 

Q"
	G		

		G	




When a stick, trim lever, or knob is used as a 

switch, two operation modes can be selected:

17
	

!
4

!
 
   ?0+,@ 
! 

 
 #     


 $ !
 " 
 $

 
 !
    	
 

	


!



	
 	
# 

 0
&?)<@D?"A0@

*Set the ON/Off point by the method described on the next page.

!"	



18


!



		  
    




# 

*The switch blinks.

-#

$


	

4!




?/D7",),*#@
$





# 

 4!


?D@


D$
	

 

	
# 




	
	
#

 %)#,%#,!
&?@D?@

10


?%)#,%#,@
!


# 


$!


-*	

!

 

	



*The mode display blinks.

'#
# #
"1 

$
	


;#

$


	

4!




?D@
$





# 

!"	
#	
"

!"	



When a switch is selected at a mixing function, etc., the selection screen shown below is called.

is, whenever the manual indicates that something is 

operated via a switch, it is possible for the user to 

activate this setting via a stick, stick position, etc.
<Appendix> 167

'

	


The operation modes available when stick, trim 

lever, or knob was selected are described below. 

9

	
	9BF

This mode sets ON/OFF to the left or right (up 

or down) with the set point as the reference. 



	
	X

Left and right (up and down) operations are 

symmetrical near the neutral position. For instance, 

when you want to switch D/R with the aileron 

stick, when the stick is moved to the left or right, 

DR can be turned on at the same position.

"#	"
	'F@'	

The ON/OFF point can be shifted. ON/OFF at 

a free position can be changed.

	
&	


7
	
&	


[Setting method]

14


!




?
"@
!

-0

4!

4 


$	



# #
$


'#

$


	

4!




?D@
$





# 
168 <Appendix>

FUTABA CORPORATION Phone: +81 475 32 6982, Facsimile: +81 475 32 6983

1080 Yabutsuka, Chosei-mura, Chosei-gun, Chiba-ken, 299-4395, Japan

©FUTABA CORPORATION 2012, 10 (1)

9#	


 %+& 7
  
 
 4 




 &7


4




 ,3& 7
 
  
 
 




4


!"	
	



10


?"<.),@
!


# 


$!


-"


?).<*@ 	





*[LOGIC] display blinks.

'#
# 	



	!


)	
	



9#	
	



10


	!

!


# 


$!


-"

 
 	 !
  	 



?%+4,3@

*The mode display blinks.

'#
# 	



	!


!"	



1"


	

$







$
$


$	


 #

$


	

4!




?"7<#*/@
$





# 

9#	!"	2	

		$

The logic switch function lets you turn operation on and off by combining two switches.
EXHIBIT 2
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 1

A2 Flight Control System

User Manual V1.20

November, 2014 Revision

Thank you for purchasing DJI products. Please strictly follow these steps to mount and connect this system on your 

aircraft, install the PC Assistant Software on your computer, as well as installing the DJI Assistant App on your 

mobile device.

Please regularly check the web page of corresponding products on our website www.dji.com, which is 

updated regularly. Product information, technical updates and manual corrections will be available on this website. 

Due to unforeseen changes or product upgrades, the information contained in this manual is subject to change 

without notice.

* This manual is for basic assembly and configuration; you can obtain more details and advanced instructions when 

using the Assistant Software. To assure you have the latest information, please visit our website and download the 

latest manual and current software version.

If you have any problems that you cannot solve during usage, please contact your authorized dealer.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 2

Content 

INTRODUCTION..............................................................................................................4

PRODUCT INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................4

IN THE BOX...........................................................................................................................4

EQUIPMENT PREPARED BY USERS ..............................................................................................4

SYSTEM INTRODUCTION...........................................................................................................5

SYMBOL INSTRUCTION ............................................................................................................5

1 ASSEMBLY AND CONFIGURATION................................................................................6

1.1 HARDWARE INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION ........................................................................6

1.1.1 Mixer Type Supported ...........................................................................................6

1.1.2 Hardware Connection Diagram.............................................................................7

1.1.3 Important for Assembly and Connection...............................................................7

1.2 SOFTWARE INSTALLATION AND CONFIGURATION...................................................................15

1.2.1 Installing Driver and Assistant Software .............................................................15

1.2.2 Configure using Assistant Software on a PC........................................................16

1.2.3 Configure the control mode switch .....................................................................17

1.2.4 Configuration Checking .......................................................................................19

1.2.5 Tools ....................................................................................................................20

1.3 COMPASS CALIBRATION ...................................................................................................22

2 BASIC FLYING .............................................................................................................23

2.1 CONTROL MODE INSTRUCTION .........................................................................................23

2.2 FLYING ENVIRONMENT REQUIREMENTS ..............................................................................25

2.3 CHECK LIST BEFORE FLYING...............................................................................................25

2.4 POWER ON AND CHECK ...................................................................................................26

2.5 START MOTORS METHODS...............................................................................................26

2.6 BASIC FLYING TEST .........................................................................................................28

3 PROTECTION FUNCTIONS SETTING ............................................................................30

3.1 FAILSAFE ......................................................................................................................30

3.2 LOW VOLTAGE PROTECTION..............................................................................................31

4 ADVANCED FEATURES................................................................................................33

4.1 IOC (INTELLIGENT ORIENTATION CONTROL) FUNCTION..........................................................33

4.1.1IOC........................................................................................................................33
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 3

4.1.2 Cruise Control......................................................................................................37

4.2 SERVO GIMBAL FUNCTION................................................................................................39

4.3 FLIGHT LIMITS ...............................................................................................................39

4.3.1 Max Height, Radius Limits & Home Fence...........................................................39

4.3.2 Flight Limits of Special Areas...............................................................................41

4.3.3 Conditions of Flight Limits...................................................................................43

4.4 PARACHUTE FUNCTION..............................................................................................44

4.5 GEAR FUNCTION ............................................................................................................44

4.6 ATTITUDE CONTROL WHEN ONE MOTOR OUTPUT FAILS........................................................45

4.7 DJI ASSISTANT APP USAGE...............................................................................................45

APPENDIX.....................................................................................................................48

LED INDICATOR DESCRIPTIONS................................................................................................48

SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................................49

FAQ ..............................................................................................................................50

USE WITH OTHER DJI PRODUCTS .............................................................................................50

CHANNEL MAPPING INSTRUCTIONS FOR PC ASSISTANT SOFTWARE ................................................52

RECOMMENDED MAPPING FOR FUTABA TRANSMITTER (MODE 2) USER.........................................54

SETTINGS OF GAIN VALUES FOR YOUR REFERENCE .......................................................................54

THE TRANSMITTER SETUP OF FUTABA....................................................................................54

DISCLAIMER .................................................................................................................56

TRADEMARK ................................................................................................................56
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 4

Introduction 

Product Introduction 

The DJI A2 Multi-Rotor stabilization controller is a complete flight system for various multi-rotor platforms for 

commercial and industrial aerial photography. Based on the technology and design philosophy of DJI’s Ace 

series of high-performance controllers, the A2 offers you a brand new flight experience. Its flight mode provides 

a seamless transition for current Ace One, WKM AP professionals. A2 features includes:

(1) Integrated with high-precision sensor components and a high-performance GPS Receiver.

(2) Utilizes high quality components precisely calibrated with temperature compensation in all gyros and 

sensors, industry renowned flight algorithm in autopilot and UAV field.

(3) Designed with built-in vibration absorption, no extra mount frame or vibration absorption pad is required.

(4) Provide high precision control and high performance handling experience.

(5) Based on the DESST technology, it has a built-in 16-channel Receiver, and supports DSM2 satellite receiver.

(6) Optional DJI D-BUS Adapter can be used with a traditional Receiver.

In the Box 

Controller Unit

(Built-in Receiver DR16)

PMU(Power Management unit) IMU(Inertia Measurement Unit)

LED-BT-I GPS-COMPASS PRO Accessories

Micro-USB Cable (1)

Servo Cables (2)

GPS Bracket

Double side sticky pads.

Equipment Prepared by Users 

Aircraft (Take Quad-rotor for example: 

Red is nose, and Black is rear)

Transmitter 

(Take Mode2 for example)

Others

Battery

DJI D-BUS Adapter

Mobile Device
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 5

System Introduction 

The A2 flight control system uses the Controller Unit at its core, which is connected with the IMU, 

GPS-COMPASS PRO、LED-BT-I、PMU and ESCs to complete the system. The system can achieve the 

height-lock and position-lock functions by using the IMU and the GPS, to control the aircraft.

Please carry out the following procedures to finish assembly, configuration and flight-testing.

 

Symbol Instruction 

General Symbol

Forbidden(Important) Cautions Tips Reference

GPS Satellite number Distance TX signal good TX signal lost

Roll to left Roll to right Pitch up Pitch down

LED Symbol 

 (N) N=1 N=2 N=3 N=4 N=6 N=20 N=∝

Meaning One Blink Two Blinks Three Blinks Four Blinks Six Blinks Twenty Blinks

Continuous

Blinks

e.g. (3) means three Red blinks.

(∝)LED blinks yellow and green alternatively.

 (N) N=∝

Meaning Continuous Solid on

e.g. (∝) means Continuous Blue Solid on.

Configure the system using A2 Assistant software.

Basic flying test FailSafe and Low-voltage settings Advanced functions: IOC, Gimbal, Gear

Mount the A2 flight control system on your aircraft finish connection.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 6

1 Assembly and Configuration 

For hardware installation, software configuration and compass calibration please adhere to the following 

sections.

1.1 Hardware Installation and Connection 

(1) Please adhere to “1.1.1 Mixer Type Supported” to choose a mixer type and assemble your aircraft.

(2) Please adhere to both “1.1.2 Hardware Connection Diagram” and “1.1.3 Important for Assembly and 

Connection” to install and connect all units on your aircraft.

1.1.1 Mixer Type Supported

Following Mixer Types are supported.

Quad-rotor X Hexa-rotor I

Hexa-rotor V Hexa-rotor Y

Quad-rotor I

Hexa-rotor IY

Octo-rotor X Octo-rotor I Octo-rotor V The direction of the arrow in diagram indicates the rotation direction of the motor/propeller.

For coaxial propellers: Blue propeller is at TOP; Red propeller is at Bottom. Otherwise all propellers 

are at top. 
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 7

1.1.2 Hardware Connection Diagram

90o

ESC 1# ESC 2# ESC 3# ESC 4# ESC 5# ESC 6# ESC 7# ESC 8#

Important Make sure the cable connections are tight before every flight. Suitable amount of hot melt adhesive is recommended to use in the connections to the CAN1 and CAN2 ports.

Important CAN-Bus, it provides power supply and communication. A2 can automatically identify the device connected. CAN1 and CAN2 ports are working independent, device connected are non-interchangeable. E.g. IMU and GPS-COMPASS PRO to CAN1; LED- BT-I to CAN2; PMU to CAN1 or CAN2.

Supply power for all ports on 2S~6S both sides of controller unit. Battery

1.1.3 Important for Assembly and Connection

This section describes all device port functions, assembly requirements, connection requirements and tips 

during usage. Also the linking procedures between the built-in Receiver DR16 and your Transmitter. Please read 

all information below carefully, especially if you are a first time user.

(1) Controller Unit 

The Controller Unit is the core component of the A2 flight control system:

(1) M1~M8 are used to connect to the ESCs of the aircraft.

(2) The built-in Receiver DR16 is based on DJI DESST technology, which can be used with the Futaba FASST 

series and DJI DESST series Transmitter. 

(3) CAN1 and CAN2 ports are working independently and should connect to different modules.

(4) 4 independent and configurable outputs.

(5) It is compatible with the external Receiver, e.g. DSM2 satellite Receiver.

(6) Use the optional DJI DBUS Adapter to support the traditional receiver.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 8

Port Description 

Connect to ESC

iOSD MARK II, Z15 from DJI

IMU

GPS-COMPASS PRO

To PW port of PMU

LED-BT-I

2.4G DATA LINK from DJI

To parachute

To S-BUS Receiver

BEC,Connect to X1 of PMU for voltage detection

To DSM2 satellite Receiver

Antenna

Link button o f Built- Indicate the linking status in receiver

DR16 and transmitter Multi-function PWM output channels, can directly give 

output signal from the Receiver if mapped to a 

Receiver channel*

*If the Gimbal function is enabled in Assistant Software, 

F2/F3 can only be used for gimbal Pitch/Roll control, 

which means F2/F3 cannot be mapped to any other 

Receiver channel.

*If the Gear function is enabled in Assistant Software, 

F1 can only be used for gear switch control, which 

means F1 cannot be mapped to any other Receiver 

channel.

 

Mounting Requirements: 

Install the Controller Unit in the proper position to make sure the ports are accessible. No specified direction is 

required.

Place the antennas in an open space under the aircraft, DO NOT block them. Position the heads of 

two antennas at a 90-degree angle. DO NOT bend or wind them.

Receiver System 

The A2 flight control system can use its own built-in Receiver, and also can support external receivers. Whatever 

type of Receiver is used, please make sure that the Receiver and Transmitter is linked correctly before use.

A. Built-in Receiver 

For enhancing the system integration and reliability, the A2 is integrated with a 2.4G receiver based on 

frequency hopping technology. The built-in Receiver can be used with the Transmitter of Futaba FASST series

or DJI DESST series after linking. For users, you are only asked to carry out the link procedures, no extra 

requirement for connection.

Please carry out the following procedures to finish the Link process, and the configuration in the A2 Assistant 

software->Basic ->R/C ->Receiver Type. Select the DR16 option.

During use, you may see the following LED indication, please do the operation according to the table below.

LED Description Operation 

(∝) Signal from Transmitter has been detected by the Receiver, but not matched. Link operation required

(∝)

No Transmitter signal is received, e.g. the flight control system is powered on 

but the Transmitter is powered off.

Switch on

(∝) The Receiver and Transmitter have been linked to each other successfully. Can work normally
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 9

0.5m<Distance<1cm

1. Turn on the transmitter, it begins to send signals after 1.5secs. 3.Press the LINK button, hold for 2secs, wait until the LED blinks Red . 4.Release the LINK button, the LED turns Green on after successfully linking.

Link Procedures 2.Power on the flight control system, configure the Receiver type as DR16 in the Assistant software.

The DR16 Receiver is compatible with the Futaba transmitters which have optional FASS MODE MULT, 

MLT2 or 7CH. Users can find out more available Futaba transmitters and configuration requirements

refer to the FAQ->The Transmitter setup of FUTABA.

 

B. DSM2 Satellite Receivers 

If using DSM2 satellite Receivers, please follow the diagram for connection, set the Receiver referring to your 

Receiver manual, and select the Receiver type as DSM2 in the Assistant software->Basic->R/C-> Receiver Type.

DSM2 satellite Receiver 1. Power on the flight control system, the Transmitter should be turned off. 3.Press and hold the LINK button on the controller unit the LED blinks red and the indicators on the Receivers blink too. Then release the LINK button the Receiver will be ready for linking. 4.Press and hold the linking button on the Transmitter then turn on the Transmitter to start linking, release the button after the Transmitter is displayed Linked or the indicators on the Receivers are solid on.

Linking procedures 2.Set the Receiver type as DSM2 in the Assistant software.

5.The LED on the controller unit will be solid green on after linking successfully.

DSM2 satellite Receiver

Notes for the DSM2 users:

 There is no need to enable the FailSafe function in the Transmitter. If the Receiver loses the signal

from the Transmitter, the controller unit will enter into FailSafe automatically, and the aircraft will 
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 10

hover or Go-home as configure in the FailSafe in the Assistant software.

 When using the dual-mode Transmitter, please set the transmiting mode as DSM2 in SYSTEM SET

UP->FRAME RATE ->MODE, which should not be DSMX.

 Support DSM2 satellite Receivers used with all SPEKTRUM Transmitters, e.g. DX6I DX7S DX8 

DX18 etc., as well as JR Transmitters, e.g. DXS9II DXS11.

C. S-BUS Receivers 

If using S-BUS Receivers please follow the diagram for connection, set the Receiver referring to your Receiver 

manual, and select the Receiver type as D-BUS in the Assistant software->Basic->R/C-> Receiver Type.

S-BUS Receiver S.BUS

Notes for the S-BUS users:

 It is no need to enable the FailSafe function in the Transmitter. Once the Receiver loses the 

signals from the Transmitter, the controller unit will enter into FailSafe automatically, and the 

aircraft will hover or Go-home as configurations of the FailSafe in the Assistant software.

D. PPM Receivers 

If using PPM Receivers please follow the diagram for connection, set the Receiver referring to your Receiver 

manual, and select the Receiver type as PPM in the Assistant software->Basic->R/C-> Receiver Type.

PPM Receiver PPM

 

 
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 11

E. Traditional Receivers 

If using Traditional Receivers, the DJI D-BUS Adapter is required. Please follow the diagram for connection, set 

the Receiver referring to your Receiver manual, and select the Receiver type as D-BUS in the Assistant 

software->Basic->R/C-> Receiver Type.

Traditional Receiver 8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1 Important · When you use a traditional receiver, DJI D-BUS ADAPTER is required. Put the switch to the “I” stop, and power on the system, the LED should be red on; otherwise, keep the switch at “I” stop and then power cycle the system. · At the “I”stop, the D-BUS ADAPTER is converting the PWM signal from traditional receiver to S-BUS signal. Notes for the traditional receiver users:

 When using the traditional receiver which doesn’t have endpoint adjustment operations to set 

FailSafe in the U channel, the Go-Home switch is recommended and users can use it to trigger

the FailSafe.

 Configure the FailSafe function of your transmitter and receiver according to its instructions, 

set the FailSafe position of the Go-Home switch in the position triggering the FailSafe function. 

If it is configured correctly as mentioned above, the FailSafe function will be activated 

automatically if the receiver loses the signal from the transmitter. 

 Users can get more information about the FailSafe function referring to 3.1 FailSafe in this 

manual and the help text in the Assistant software.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 12

(2) IMU (Inertial Measurement Unit): 

 

Built-in inertial sensors, for the measurement of aircraft attitude; built-in pressure sensor for the detection of 

aircraft altitude. Should be connected to the CAN1 port of the Controller Unit, and be mounted according to 

the required location and orientation. The IMU has been calibrated before delivery, it should be used under the 

specified temperature; otherwise the temperature may have an effect on the IMU performance.

Working environment temperature: -5

oC ~60oC Storage environment temperature:<60oC

Orientation Requirements: 

Please mount the IMU as one of the following options. Configure in the A2 Assistant software ->Basic ->Mount -> 

IMU, and select the matched option.

Pointing Forward Pointing Backward Pointing to Left Pointing to Right Location Requirements: 

 

Center of Gravity

 

Fix with double faced adhesive tape. (1) The top side should be facing up. DO NOT mount upside-down.

(2) DO NOT cover the ventilation holes, keep them unblocked and clean.

(3) Take heat preservation measures if working in cold weather.

(1) Mount the IMU at a low vibration position and the sides of the IMU should be precisely parallel 

to the aircraft body. Based on our experience, there is less vibration near the aircraft’s center 

of gravity.

(2) NOT water-proof or oil-proof.

(3) Check the double faced adhesive tape regularly to make sure that the IMU is fixed firmly.

There is a CAN-Bus connector, which can be used to connect to the GPS-COMPASS PRO or other DJI product.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 13

(3) GPS-COMPASS PRO 

GPS-COMPASS PRO module has a built-in GPS and compass. The compass is used for geomagnetic field

measurement. It should be mounted according to the required location and orientation. Compass calibration is 

required before use. DO NOT use and store the compass in the ferromagnetic material environment.

 

Mounting Procedure: 

a) Use the epoxy resin AB glue to assemble the GPS bracket first. The longest one is recommended.

b) Mount the bracket on the aircraft first, and then fix the GPS-COMPASS PRO on the plate of the bracket 

(using the 3M sticky pads provided).

Mounting Position:

The arrow is pointing to the nose direction.

Use the GPS bracket, and keep it away from other electronic equipment

Keep it parallel to the aircraft

Usage Requirements 

(1) The DJI logo should be facing the sky, with the orientation arrow pointing directly to the nose 

direction; otherwise it may lead to take off failure.

(2) Fly the aircraft in an open space without buildings or trees; otherwise it may have an effect on

the GPS.

(3) The compass is sensitive to magnetic interference, should be far away from electronic devices, 

otherwise it may lead to abnormal flying.

(4) Please always keep the compass module away from magnet fields. Otherwise it may damage 

the compass module and lead the aircraft to work abnormally or even be out of control.

 

 
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 14

(4) PMU (Power Management Unit) 

The PMU provides dual BECs (Battery Eliminator Circuit):

(1) PW port outputs power for the whole Flight Control System with current no more than 2A. 

(2) PX port outputs power (3A@5V) and V-SEV signal using the low voltage protection function.

In addition, there are two CAN-Bus ports for LED-BT-I connection and other DJI products (e.g. DJI 2.4G Data 

Link).

Port Description 

To positive pole of power To negative pole of power CAN-Bus port Connect to CAN1 or CAN2 port of Controller Unit, CAN2 is recommended.

V-SEN, Output 0V ~ + 3.3V VCC, Output 3A@5V GND Input voltage range: 7.4V~26V

PX Port, connect to the X1 port of Controller Unit Working status indicator Green on is normally working

Mounting Requirements: 

Choose a ventilated place to mount the PMU for cooling, no mounting orientation requirement.

(5) LED-BT-I 

The LED-BT-I has integrated LED Indicator, Bluetooth and USB port:

(1) The LED is mainly for flight control system status indication during flying (e.g. Control Mode).

(2) Bluetooth is used for real-time communication with your mobile device (e.g. iPhone), to realize parameter 

configuration on a mobile device. For parameter configuration using a mobile device, it is required to 

install the DJI Assistant App on the mobile device. When you mount the LED-BT-I, please make sure the 

side with ANT LOGO is unsheltered after mounting.

(3) In addition, there is a Micro-USB port, make sure it is mounted for convenient connection.

Port Description: 

Micro-USB port:used to connect to the PC for Assistant software configuration and upgrade Bluetooth status indicator Abnormal Normal Communicating Indicator of autopilot system Antenna of Bluetooth Mounting Requirements: 

Mount in a good place to make sure the LED is visible during flying. Antenna of Bluetooth should be unobstructed.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 15

1.2 Software Installation and Configuration 

Please configure the A2 flight control system in the Assistant Software according to the following instructions. 

Users are required to configure every item within the “Basic” page when use the A2 flight control system for the 

first time. 

1.2.1 Installing Driver and Assistant Software

Installing and running on Windows 

1. Download driver installer and Assistant Software installer in EXE format from the download page of A2 

on the DJI website.

2. Connect the A2 flight control system to a PC via a Micro-USB cable. The Micro-USB port of the A2 flight 

control system is on the LED-BT-I module.

3. Run the driver installer and follow the prompts to finish installation.

4. Next, run the assistant software installer and follow the prompts to finish installation.

5. Double click the A2 icon on your Windows desktop to launch the software.

The installer in EXE format only supports Windows operating systems (Win XP, Win7, Win8 (32 or 64 bit)).

Installing and running on Mac OS X

1. Download the Assistant Software installer in DMG format from the download page of A2 on the DJI 

website.

2. Run the installer and follow the prompts to finish installation.

3. When launching for the first time if use Launchpad to run the A2 Assistant software, Launchpad will not 

allow access because the software has not been reviewed by Mac App Store. 

4. Locate the A2 icon in the Finder, press the Control key and then click the A2 icon (or right-click the A2 

icon using a mouse). Choose Open from the shortcut menu, click Open in the prompt dialog box and 

then the software will launch.

5. After the first successful launch, direct launching of the software can be achieved by double-clicking the 

A2 icon in the Finder or using Launchpad.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 16

Installer in DMG format supports only Mac OS X 10.9 or above.

Usage of A2 Assistant software on Mac OS X and Windows are exactly the same. The Assistant 

software pages appear in other places of this manual are on the Windows for example. 

1.2.2 Configure using Assistant Software on a PC

A2 flight control system can takes power via the USB port during configuration, no additional battery is required. 

Note that the USB port can supply power no more than 500mA, an additional battery is necessary if connection 

failure or intermittent working.

Run the assistant software, and follow the built-in guide to carry out the configuration. Note that you may be asked 

to register for first time use.

4 3 2 1

Setting Options

Built-in Guide

Menu

1. View 2. Restore &Upgrade 3.Set 4.Check

Click “Info” to view 

user information 

and software 

version etc.

Enter “Tools” to restore default 

settings. And check whether the 

firmware is the latest.

Enter “Basic” page. 

Set the Aircraft, 

Mounting, RC, Gain” 

in each tab.

Enter “View” 

page to check all 

basic settings.

 
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 17

“RC 

STATUS”

description

Normal: the transmitter and receiver are linked and communicating well.

Disconnect: the A2 Flight Control System is powered on, but the transmitter is powered off.

RC-LOST: RC signal is lost (e.g. the transmitter is turned off after power on) or the receiver 

is sending F/S signals (e.g. the aircraft flies out of the range which transmitter is 

controllable).

 

The firmware version and the Assistant Software version should be matched when using the software 

to configure the A2 flight control system, otherwise the software will not work. It’s recommended to 

keep the firmware version and Assistant Software version up to date to avoid this issues.

1.2.3 Configure the control mode switch

Users should configure the control mode switch in the Assistant software in the following page. Only the control 

mode switch has been set correctly, the control mode displayed in the left bottom corner will be the same to the 

control mode pointed by the cursor on the channel U.

Configuration steps Exambles

Step 1.

Power on your Transmitter, map a 3-position 

switch on the transmitter to the U channel of 

Controller Unit as the control mode switch, of 

which two positions are default as Atti. Mode 

and GPS Atti. Mode and the third position is 

optional, users can set as Atti. Mode or 

Manual Mode.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 18

Step 2.

Toggle the control mode switch to its three 

positions, accordingly the cursor will move to 

some control mode. 

 

Step 3.

Power off the Transmitter, the FailSafe will be 

enabled and the cursor will point to any area 

out of the control modes. 

Step 4.

If all steps above are realized, that indicates the 

control mode switch is set successfully.

Important 

In step 2, if the cursor doesn’t point to the correct control mode area (e.g. the following figures), that indicates 

abnormal control mode switch configuration. Users must re-configure the Endpoint and FailSafe functions in the 

Transmitter to make the cursor point to the right control mode and the according areas become blue.

 
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 19

1.2.4 Configuration Checking

*Fig. above for reference only, please adhere to actual GUI.

Check List Description

1 Check the IMU orientation direction.

2 

Check the Mixer Type of aircraft.

Make sure the motors are rotating normally, and propeller installation is in correct direction.

3 The Receiver type is correct.

4、5 Check the basic and attitude gains. 

6

Move the sticks to test whether the cursors moves following the sticks. Toggle the “U” switch to 

test the control mode setting.

7~○11

Advanced configuration, users can configure it according to their requirements after reading the 

manual.

○12 Check the Channel Map between the Transmitter and A2 flight control system.

1 2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 20

1.2.5 Tools 

1 Config 

Export or import the tuning parameters and restore the default setting and reset the BTU module. 

2 Sensors 

Read gyroscope, acceleration and compass sensor value. 

3 IMU Calibration 

Calibrate IMU based on the gyroscope and acceleration sensor readings from Assistant. Calibrate is needed, when:

 Gyroscope Mod value exceeds 1.5. 

 Acceleration Mod value below 0.98 or exceeds 1.02. 

Steps to follow when calibrating IMU:

1. Go to IMU Calibration section after powering on A2, wait until A2 enters “Ready” status.

2. Click “Calibration”, take note of the following warning message:

 Place the IMU on a stationary and horizontal surface and ensure A2 logo faces upward.

3. Click “OK” to proceed.

1

2

3

4
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 21

4 Device Information and Connection Status 

All devices that connected to the A2 flight controller are highlighted, however, disconnected devices appear grey. 

Single click a highlighted device to upgrade its firmware. You can also upgrade all firmware by clicking the 

“Upgrade All” button.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 22

1.3 Compass Calibration 

The Compass can assistant the GPS to position the aircraft, which is very important during flight. As we know, 

the compass is very sensitive to electromagnetic interference, which will cause abnormal compass data, and lead 

to poor flight performance or even flight failure. Compass Calibration MUST be done for first time use.

It is recommended to calibrate the compass outdoors after the Controller Unit finds 7 or more GPS satellites. 

Regular calibration enables the compass to keep optimal performance.

Calibration Cautions 

(1) DO NOT calibrate your compass where there is strong magnetic interference, such as magnetite, 

car park, and steel reinforcement under the ground.

(2) DO NOT carry ferromagnetic materials with you during calibration, such as keys or cell phones.

(3) Compass Calibration is very important; otherwise the flight control system cannot work.

Calibration Procedures 

Choose an open space to carry out the following procedures.

Control Mode LED

Quickly flip the control mode switch 360o Rotate the aircraft horizontally 360o

Rotate the aircraft vertically (Nose downward) Position1* Position 3

Position1->3->1 once Start horizontal calibration Start vertical calibration Succeed Fail

Position1->3->1 Flip 6~10 times Start cali

Position1* Re-calibrate Position 3 Situations that require recalibration

Situations Descriptions 

Compass Data abnormal LED blinks yellow and green alternatively( (∝)).

Flying field altered Flying field has changed over a long distance.

Mechanical alteration

The mounting position of GPS-COMPASS PRO module changes.

Electronic units such as Controller Unit, CAN-HUB, battery etc. have been added, 

removed, remounted or other alterations. 

Mechanical structures of the aircraft has changed

Drifting during flying Evident drifts occurred in flight such as the aircraft doesn’t fly straight 

Attitude errors LED often blinks error indicator when the aircraft turns around. 
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 23

2 Basic flying 

Read this section before basic flight testing.

2.1 Control Mode Instruction 

The aircraft performs differently when using different control modes. Please read the following table to know 

the different control modes, which may help you to achieve a more involved flight experience.

Control Mode GPS ATTI. Mode ATTI. Mode Manual Mode 

Command 

Linearity 

YES

Yaw 

Control the aircraft to rotate in clockwise and counter clockwise direction. Maximum rudder 

angular velocity 150°/s

Roll and Pitch 

Aircraft attitude control; Mid point of stick is for 0 ̊ attitude, 

and its endpoint is 35 ̊.

Max-angular velocity is 150°/s. 

No attitude angle limit.

Throttle

Aircraft height control. Maintain the altitude best above 1 

meter from ground when the throttle stick is in mid position.

No altitude locking when the 

throttle stick is in mid position.

All Sticks 

Released

Lock position if GPS signal is 

adequate.

Only attitude stabilizing.

No position locking.

Keep original attitude.

GPS Lost

Once GPS signal lost the flight 

control system will enter ATTI.

Mode automatically. Return to

GPS ATT1. Mode after GPS signal 

has recovered for 2 seconds.

--- ---

IOC Supported CL/HL/POI/BTM CL None

Assign a 3-position switch of the transmitter as the control mode switch. The position-1 is defaulted as “GPS 

ATTI. Mode” and the position-2 is “ATTI. Mode”. The position-3 can be set as “Manual Mode” or “ATTI. Mode” in 

A2 assistant software.

Control Mode 

Switch 

position-1 position-2 position-3 

Configurable 

Control Mode 

GPS ATTI. Mode ATTI. Mode * ATTI. Mode * Manual Mode 

FailSafe 

Protection 

The flight control system will enter FailSafe

Mode if the Transmitter signal is lost and no 

matter if Transmitter signal recovers or not, 

system will not exit FailSafe mode automatically.

The flight control system will enter 

FailSafe Mode if the Transmitter signal is 

lost and the system will exit FailSafe once 

the signal recovers.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 24

GPS Involved YES NO

Low-voltage 

Protection 

LED alert with Descending or Go Home & 

Landing precautions

Only LED alert

Environment 

recommended 

Open flying field; 

Good GPS signal

Narrow Space; 

GPS signal bad

Regain control in emergency 

The difference between ATTI. Mode of position-2 and ATTI. Mode of position-3 is that they are working differently 

in protection situations.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 25

2.2 Flying Environment Requirements 

(1) Before use of the product, please accept some flight training (Using a simulator to practice flying, 

getting instruction from a professional person, etc.).

(2) DO NOT fly in bad weather, such as rain or wind (more than moderate breeze) or fog.

(3) The flying field should be open without tall buildings or other obstacles; the buildings of steel 

structure will interfere with the compass.

(4) Keep the aircraft away from obstacles, crowds, power lines, trees, lakes and rivers etc.

(5) Try to avoid interference between the remote control Transmitter and other wireless equipment.

(No base station or cell tower around)

(6) The flight control system can’t work at the South Pole and the North Pole.

(7) All parts must be kept out of the reach of children to avoid CHOKE HAZARD; if a child 

accidentally swallows any part you should immediately seek medical assistance.

2.3 Check List before Flying 

Double check the following list, otherwise, if any one of the following items is wrong it may lead to flight accident.

(1) All parts are in good condition, no ageing or damaged components

(2) Motor rotating direction

(3) Propeller mounting direction

(4) Mixer Type set in assistant software

(5) IMU and GPS-COMPASS PRO mounting direction

(6) Transmitter channel mapping and sticks movement direction correct

(7) Compass calibration

(8) ESC connection

(9) IMU and GPS-COMPASS PRO firmly mounted

In addition, check the following items to make sure the system can work.

(1) The Transmitter battery is fully charged.

(2) The aircraft battery is fully charged.

(3) Do not over load the aircraft.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 26

2.4 Power on and Check 

(1) Control mode LED indicator 

Power on the Transmitter then the flight control system. Toggle the control mode switch to different positions. 

Control Mode LED indicator 

Control Mode 

Switch GPS ATTI. Mode ATTI. Mode Manual Mode

LED (Stick not in midpoint (2)) (Stick not in midpoint (2)) No LED indicator

Set

Put the Control Mode switch to GPS position for basic flying test.

Note: when the GPS signal LED indicator is bad or worst ( (2) or (3)) and lasts for more 

than 3secs, the flight control system will enter into ATTI. Mode.

(2) GPS signal LED indicator

GPS signal indication blinks after every Control mode indication. We suggest flying when GPS satellites are more 

than 5.

GPS signal LED indicator 

Worst ( < 5): (3) Bad ( = 5): (2) Well ( = 6): (1) Best ( > 6):No indicator

2.5 Start Motors Methods

CSC (Combination sticks commands) is used to start motors instead of just pushing the throttle stick. One of the 

following methods can be used to start/stop motors.

CSC 1

 

CSC 2

 

CSC 3

 

CSC 4

 

Under the conditions stated below, the motors will stop in ATTI. Mode/GPS ATTI. Mode:

(1) The throttle sticks is under 10% for more than 3secs after motors start.

(2) The throttle sticks is under 10% for more than 3secs after landing.

(3) The throttle sticks is under 10% for more than 3secs and the inclined angle of aircraft exceeds 

70°。

If motors fail to start, please refer to the following list for trouble shooting.

(1) The Controller Unit fails to obtain the firmware version of IMU and GPS, please check the 

connection or upgrade the IMU and GPS.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 27

(2) The firmware version of IMU and Controller Unit is mismatched; please upgrade the firmware of 

IMU or Controller Unit.

(3) The firmware version of GPS and Controller Unit is mismatched; please upgrade the firmware of 

GPS or Controller Unit.

(4) The transmitter calibration has exited abnormally, please recalibrate.

(5) The transmitter calibration results with big bias, please recalibrate.

(6) The transmitter calibration results with big mid point bias, please recalibrate.

(7) Incorrect channel mappings, please make sure the basic channels A/E/T/R/U are mapped 

correctly.

(8) Invalid SN or SN error; please contact your dealer or DJI custom service.

(9) The Controller Unit is locked, please unlock the Controller Unit and reconfigure all the parameters 

in the Assistant software.

(10) IMU disconnected, please check the connection.

(11) Compass data abnormal, please eliminate magnetic interference and recalibrate the compass.

(12) When Flight limit function is enabled, if the aircraft fly out of the max-radius in ATTI. mode and the 

motors are stalling, the motors will fail to spool up in GPS ATTI. mode cause the Flight limit 

function works.

(13) The attitude status is bad and the LED indicator blinks white, the motors will fail to spool up.

(14) The Transmitter disconnected, the motors will fail to spool up.

(15) The A2 flight control system is connecting and communicating with the Assistant software, the 

motors will fail to spool up.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 28

2.6 Basic Flying Test 

Carry out the following procedures to complete the basic flight test.

1. Wait the GPS signal to be well LED 

Place the aircraft away from you and others at least 3 meters and wait the ≥6

(about 30 seconds).

or no Red LED

2. Start motors and takeoff aircraft. LED 

Execute CSC to start motors; all sticks back to midpoint as soon as motors start, then push 

the throttle stick to take off the aircraft, meanwhile the home point is recorded. NOTE: 

36secs after power on; 10secs after ≥6; Motors have been started, auto-record the 

position as home point at the first time the throttle stick is raised

(∝)

After the home point is recorded successfully and the distance from aircraft is less than 8m, 

LED indicator will blink 6 violet continually. Note: only when GPS signal is good (no Red

LED) LED indicator will blink 6 violet continually.

(6)

3.Operate sticks to control the flying attitude of the aircraft during flight 

Transmitter (Mode2) Aircraft Operations 

Throttle

Stick

Push Throttle sticks to control the aircraft 

to elevate and descend. The aircraft can 

lock to an altitude when the throttle stick 

is at midpoint.

Yaw Stick Push the yaw stick to rotate the aircraft in 

clockwise or counter clockwise direction. 

Roll Stick

Push roll stick to control the aircraft left 

or right, pitch stick to control forward or 

backward.

When both roll and pitch sticks are at 

midpoint:

(1) GPS ATTI. Mode: the aircraft will 

be stabilized and locked in 

horizontal position.

(2) ATTI. Mode: the aircraft will be 

stabilized but unlocked in 

horizontal position.

Pitch

Stick
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 29

4.Hover 

In GPS ATTI. Mode,the aircraft will hover when the throttle/yaw/roll/pitch sticks are all released at mid-point.

5.Landing 

Use the throttle stick to control the landing speed, try to land your aircraft gently to avoid shock or crash.

 

Please refer to the next section “Protection Functions Setting” to take precautions. 

(1) Low voltage alert: yellow quick flashes or red quick flashes.

(2) FailSafe: LED indicator blinks blue.

 

Moreover, you may come across the following abnormal situation, please carry out the operation below.

(3) Compass data is abnormal; the LED blinks yellow and green alternatively. Please re-calibrate the 

Compass.

(4) IMU data is abnormal, the LED blinks four green. Please contact your dealer.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 30

3 Protection Functions Setting 

Set protection in the Assistant software ->Advanced page. FailSafe and Low voltage protections are required. 

3.1 FailSafe 

FailSafe works when the Transmitter (TX) signal is lost, the flight control system will automatically control the 

aircraft to reduce injuries or damage.

TX 

signal

Descriptions

Home 

Point 

(HP)

≥

6

Home point will be recorded:

- After 30 seconds of strong GPS signal

- 10 seconds later after green LEDs have stopped blinking, when throttle sticks are 

moved away from mid point.

FailSafe

Customize the failsafe to define what happens if remote control signal is lost. Choose 

from either auto hovering, RTH or "RTH at a preset altitude in the A2 Assistant"

One-Key 

Go Home

A switch can be set to trigger RTH without signal loss. If One-Key RTH is enabled 

during flight, aircraft control will cease and LED lights will indicate Control Mode. 

Release the RTH switch to regain control. If the Failsafe has been triggered the 

switch will not work.

With One-Key RTH in progress, aircraft orientation can be controlled while the 

aircraft returns.

FailSafe and Go Home procedures 

1 Record Home Point (HP) 2 Confirm Home Point 3 Transmitter Signal Lost

4 Signal Lost Lasts 3secs. 5Go Home(20m can be customized)

Height over HP<=20m Height over HP>20m 6 Landing after Hovering 15secs

20m Elevate to 20m

LED LED LED

LED LED LED

<8m ≥7

(∝) (6) (∝)

(∝) (∝) (∝) 

(1) The aircraft will not go home (only attitude stabilizing) in the condition that <6 or GPS is not 

working, even if Transmitter signal is lost or Go Home switch is triggered.

(2) It is recommended to set the Go Home switch in the Assistant software. Users are suggested to
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 31

enter FailSafe and go home by using the Go Home switch rather than turning off the Transmitter 

in emergency situations.

(3) Make sure there are no obstacles during aircraft go home and users are familiar with the methods

to regain control.

 

How to regain control in FailSafe

3-position 

Switch 

Position-1 Position-2 Position-3 

GPS ATTI. Mode ATTI. Mode ATTI. Mode Manual Mode

Regain control

You have to toggle the control mode switch 

once to regain control if the signal recovers.

Regain control as soon as signal recovers.

3.2 Low Voltage Protection 

Low voltage protection is used to alert low battery voltage during flight; in this case, users should promptly fly 

back the aircraft and land to avoid unexpected damages.

To use this function please set in Assistant software->Advanced->Voltage page to configure two voltage levels. 

Protections Option Selected Conditions LED Aircraft 

First level

LED ---- (∝) None 

GH & Landing

Make sure the home point is recorded and 

no obstacles in going home and landing path. 

(∝) Go-Home & Landing

Second 

level

LED ---- (∝) None 

Descending ---- (∝) Descending directly

 

Go-Home & Landing Usage Tips 

(1) The home point recorded is the same in both FailSafe and Low voltage protection. The aircraft will not go

home in the following cases :

a) Control mode switch is at the position-3 (Manual Mode or ATTI. Mode)

b) GPS signal is bad ( <6)

c) The distance between aircraft and the home point is less than 25m, and the height over the Home 

point less than 20m.

Descending Usage Tips 

The aircraft will not hover when the throttle stick is at the mid point. Push the throttle stick to 90% of its 

endpoint, the aircraft will still ascend slowly if you continue to pull the throttle stick, and the control of Pitch, 

Roll and Yaw are the same as before.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 32

(1) Please pay attention to the LED alert of low voltage and make sure the power is enough for go 

home and landing. Insufficient power reserve will cause the aircraft to crash as well as other 

consequences.

(2) If the second level low voltage alert occurs in below procedures, the aircraft will descend 

automatically.

a) When the aircraft is in FailSafe and Go Home process。

b) When the aircraft is controlled by the Ground Station.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 33

4 Advanced Features 

The advanced features of A2 include IOC (intelligent orientation control), gimbal control, parachute activation 

and so on. It also enable users to tweak the A2 configuration via the A2 Assistant wirelessly through the 

Bluetooth connection. 

4.1 IOC (Intelligent Orientation Control) function 

4.1.1IOC

IOC Help users to set the Flying direction; Should be enabled in Assistant software.

Flying direction The flying direction of aircraft when pushing the Roll and Pitch sticks.

Forward direction The flying direction of aircraft when the pitch stick is pushed forward.

Normal flying 

IOC is disabled. Forward direction is pointing to the nose direction and changes 

along with the nose.

CL(course lock) 

mode

Its forward direction is pointing to the nose direction when recording, which is 

fixed until you re-record it or exit from CL.

HL (home lock) mode

Record a Home Point (HP), push Pitch stick to control the aircraft far from or 

near to the HP.

POI mode

Point of Interest. Record a point of interest (POI), the aircraft can circle around 

the POI, and the nose always points to the POI.

BTM (Banked Turn) 

mode 

In this mode, the roll and yaw sticks are combined to help you perform banked 

turns with only one hand.

 

Conditions of IOC function 

Flying 

IOC 

Setting

Control Mode

GPS-COMPASS 

PRO Required

GPS Satellites Distance Limits

Normal ---- ---- ---- Basic to control mode None 

CL Enabled Not Manual Mode Compass None None 

HL Enabled GPS ATTI. Mode GPS ≥6

≥10m Aircraft HP

POI Enabled GPS ATTI. Mode GPS ≥6

5m~500m Aircraft POI

BTM Enabled GPS ATTI. Mode GPS ≥6 None

 

Step 1 IOC switch setting 

Please enable the IOC function in Advanced->IOC page of Assistant software. Then choose a 3-positon switch on 

the Transmitter to set as IOC switch, which is used to select the different IOC modes and manually record the 

Forward direction, HP and POI recording.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 34

There are six types of IOC switch setting. Below are the three recommended options of IOC switch setting which 

may be configured in the Assistant software.

Switch positions A B C

1 OFF OFF OFF

2 CL CL CL

3 HL POI BTM

 

Step 2 Forward Direction, HP and POI Recording 

After you enable the IOC in assistant software, the flight control system will record the forward direction and home 

point automatically after power on, if the recording conditions are met. You can manually re-record the forward 

direction, home point and POI during flying. Note that no BTM recording is required. Read the following table for 

the recording method details.

CL HL POI

Recorded 

Orientation

Aircraft’s nose as forward 

direction

Home point

The position that the user 

wish to fly around.

Conditions 36 secs after power on

10secs later after ≥6;

Motors have been started.

10secs later after ≥6.

Automatically

Automatically record at 36

secs after power on

Automatically record at the first 

time you push the throttle stick

No Automatic record method

Manual 

According to any option of IOC switch setting, quickly toggle the switch between adjacent 

positions 3-5 times to record manually.

1

2

A

Forward

direction

C 2

3

A

HP

B

POI

C

None

B

Forward

direction

Forward

direction

Successful (20) (20) (20)

 

(1) DO NOT toggle the switch between the position 1 and 3 frequently, which may re-record the 

position 2.

(2) The new Home Point and Forward Direction can be set only after one has already been recorded 

automatically.

(3) HP is not only used in IOC, but also in FailSafe and Low voltage as go home and landing

destination. The flight control system will automatically record the HP even if IOC function is 

disabled in Assistant software but Forward direction and POI can be recorded only after IOC is 

enabled.

(4) Once the Home Point is recorded successfully, LED will blink (6) continually under the 
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 35

following conditions. All conditions must be true.

1. ≥6.

2. Distance between aircraft and the recorded home point is less than 8m.

3. Current control mode is in GPS ATTI. Mode or ATTI. Mode of switch position-2.

 

Step 3 CL, HL and POI flying test

Please study the following diagram then make an IOC flying test. IOC LED indicator blinks ( (2) means not all 

stick(s) at the midpoint)

HP POI Flying direction Forward direction Route Auxiliary line

Flying 

IOC

switch

Record 

Pitch stick control of aircraft Roll stick control of aircraft

Normal OFF None

CL CL

HL HL

>10m

>10m

>

10m

>

10m

POI POI

5~500m

5~500m

5~500m

5~500m

DO NOT toggle the IOC switch frequently in HL flying to avoid re-recording the HP unwittingly.

IOC function is available only when all the required conditions are satisfied. If any condition is omitted

the flight control system will exit IOC. Please keep an eye on the LED to know the current control mode.

(1) It is recommended to start the HL flight when the aircraft is >10m away from the HP. If starting

the HL when the distance between aircraft and HP is less than 10m and it’s the first time you 

start HL after power on, then the flight control system will only enter HL after flying out of the 

10m range.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 36

(2) During HL flying if one of the following conditions occur, the flight control system will exit HL and 

enter into CL: the aircraft is within of 10m from HP; the control mode is changed to ATTI. Mode; 

<6(LED (2) or (3)).

Step 4 Banked Turn mode flying test 

Banked Turn Mode is useful when you want to perform banked turns one handed. It allows you to pitch and roll to 

turn without using the yaw stick. 

Application examples:

1. Normal and FPV aerial photography in this mode is smooth and simple, giving a different visual feel to your 

work.

2. In this mode, the roll and yaw sticks are combined to help you perform banked turns with only one hand.

Setting steps (Mode 2):

1. To enable Banked Turn Mode, replace the POI gear of the IOC switch with Banked Turn gear. 

2. With Banked Turn Mode activated, you can circle the aircraft with just one stick. To do this, Mode 2 (throttle 

on the left stick) users should select the “Use Roll” option while Mode 1 (throttle on the right stick) users 

should select the “Use Yaw” option. 
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 37

Using Banked Turn Mode (Mode 2):

1. Select “Use Roll” to disable the yaw stick or select “Use Yaw” to disable the roll stick.

2. Push pitch stick to move the aircraft forward or backward.

3. After that, Push roll stick left or right to perform banked turn as the following diagram shown. No yaw stick 

required. 

4. When the aircraft is hovering, yaw is controlled by the roll stick instead.

5. Rapidly pull the pitch stick to the mid-point to stop the aircraft.

Flying 

IOC

switch

Record 

Pitch stick Roll stick Pitch stick Roll stick Pitch stick Roll stick Pitch stick Roll stick 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

BTM BTM None

(1) Banked Turn Mode works only with GPS-ATTI mode (GPS ≥6). The aircraft will stop and hover when 

less than 6 satellites are found. 

(2) Once the aircraft performs side slip, adjust the drift damping value. Note that too big value may lead 

to aircraft vibration.

4.1.2 Cruise Control 

Cruise Control allows you to lock the speed of the aircraft, freeing you to control the gimbal while maintaining 

flight. 

Application examples:

1. By maintaining steady flight, you can focus more on your shots and gimbal control, and your total flight time is 

increased by eliminating unnecessary speed changes.

2. Activate Cruise Control to lock your aircraft into its current horizontal speed when you release the control 

sticks.

Cruise Control only works when IOC has been enabled. Tick the Cruise Control box in the A2 Assistant to enable it. 
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 38

Assign a 3-gear switch on the remote control for Cruise Control. Follow the steps below to use Cruise Control. 

Use the control sticks to accelerate the aircraft to your target speed then toggle the assigned Cruise Control switch 

to “Set” or “Continues”.

The action of three different gears of the cruise speed is defined as follow:

 Close 

Deactivate Cruise Control. 

 Set 

Move the switch to this position in flight to “Set” the cruising speed. The speed at the point that the switch is 

toggled will be maintained. If you use the control sticks to adjust aircraft speed, the aircraft will return to its 

original speed once the control sticks return to center.

 Continues 

In this position the aircraft will maintain its speed of flight however if you accelerate or slow down, it will 

continue flying at the new speed once the control sticks return to center.

(1) Cruise Control only works in GPS-ATTI mode (GPS > 6).

(2) The aircraft will exit Cruise Control mode and hover at its current altitude when less than 6 GPS 

satellites are detected, switches to ATTI. mode or enters auto go home mode. To enter“Set” and 

“Continue” modes, you must first go into “OFF” mode.

(3) Cruise Control is disabled during Banked Turn mode flying.

(4) Maximum speed is 15m/s under Cruise Control mode.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 39

4.2 Servo Gimbal function 

Connect the servos of your gimbal to the Controller Unit as the fig. below,roll servo connects to F3 port and 

pitch servo connects to F2, and configure in Advanced->Gimbal page in the Assistant software. No Receiver

channel is asked to be mapped for the F2 or F3 port if gimbal function is enabled in the Assistant Software.

Note: Even you map Receiver channels to F3 and F2 (Which are shown as D3 and D2 in the Assistant Software

-> Channel Mapping), the F3 and F2 will not give output signals from the mapped Receiver channels.

F3

F2 Pitch Roll

4.3 Flight Limits 

All unmanned aerial vehicle (UAV) operators should abide by all regulations from such organizations as the ICAO 

(International Civil Aviation Organization) and their own national airspace regulations. For safety reasons, the flight 

limits function is enabled by default to help users use this product safely and legally. The flight limits function 

includes height, distance limits and safety zone.

In Ready to Fly mode, height, distance limits and No Fly Zones work together to manage flight. In Ready to Fly

(non-GPS) status, only height limits applies and flights cannot go higher than 120m.

Default parameters in Assistant Software are compliant within the definitions of class G ruled by ICAO. 

(Refer to Airspace Classification to get more details). As each country has its own rules, make sure to 

configure these parameters to comply with these rules before flying.

4.3.1 Max Height, Radius Limits & Home Fence

The Max Height & Radius restricts the flying height and distance. Configuration can be done in the A2 Assistant. 

Once complete, your aircraft will fly in a restricted cylinder.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 40

 

Max Height Max Radius

Home Point Height of aircraft when powered on

GPS ATTI mode 

 Limits Ground Station Tips 

Max Height Flight height must be under the set height. Warning: Height limit reached.

Max Radius Flight distance must be within the max radius. Warning: Distance limit reached. 

ATTI mode 

 Flight Limits Ground Station Tips 

Max Height Flight height restricted to 120m and under. Warning: Height limit reached.

Max Radius No limits 

(1) If you fly out of the limit, you can still control the aircraft, but cannot fly it further. 

(2) If the aircraft flies out of the max radius in ATTI mode, it will fly back within range automatically.

Home fence is a safety feature that prevents the aircraft from coming in too close to an operator. When enabled, 

the aircraft will not be able to enter a safe area defined by the user.

Application examples:

1. Supply safe guard for new users in case of damage from wrong operation.

2. Keep users safe when aircraft flies close in a high speed.

The safety radius can be set in the A2 Assistant as shown below:
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 41

 

Assign a switch on the remote control to turn the home fence feature on and off. The safety radius range can 

be set between 12m and 100m.

(1) Home fence feature works only with GPS-ATTI mode. NO home fence limit for ATTI mode and 

navigation mode.

(2) Failsafe procedure overrides the home fencing feature. 

4.3.2 Flight Limits of Special Areas

Restricted areas include airports worldwide. All restricted areas are listed on the DJI official website at 

http://www.dji.com/fly-safe/category-mc. Restricted areas are divided into category A and category B. Category A 

areas cover major international airport such as LAX and Heathrow, while category B areas includes smaller airports.

Category A Safety Zone 

 The category A “safety zone” is comprised of a small “no-fly zone” and a range of “restricted-altitude zones”. 

Flight is prevented in the “no-fly zone” but can continue with height restrictions in the restricted-altitude zone.

 1.5 miles (2.4 km) around a designated safety zone is a no-fly zone, inside which takeoff is prevented. 

 1.5 miles (2.4 km) to 5 miles (8 km) around restricted areas are altitude restricted, with maximum altitude going 

from 35 feet (10.5 m) at 1.5 miles (2.4 km) to 400 feet (120 m) at 5 miles (8 km).

 A “warning zone” has been set around the safety zone. When you fly within 320 feet (100m) of the safety zone, a 

warning message will appear on the DJI Ground Station.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 42

 Category A 

Category B Safety Zone 

 Category B “safety zone” is comprised of a “no-fly zone” and a “warning zone”.

 0.6 miles (1 km) around the safety zone is a designated “no-fly zone”.

 A “warning zone” has been set around the safety zone. When you fly within 0.6 miles (1Km) of this zone, a warning 

will appear on the DJI Ground Station.

Category B

GPS ATTI mode 

Zone Restriction Rear LED Flight Indicator 

No-fly Zone

Motors will not start.

If the aircraft enters the restricted area in ATTI mode but 

GPS ATTI mode activates, the aircraft will automatically

descend to land then stop its motors after landing. 

Blink red quickly and continue 

for 3 seconds before normal 

blinks.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 43

Restricted-altitude 

flight zone

If the aircraft enters a restricted area in ATTI mode and 

GPS ATTI mode activates, it will descend to a safe altitude 

and hover 15 feet below the safe altitude.

Blink yellow quickly and 

continue for 3 seconds before 

Warning zone normal blinks.

 

No flight restriction applies, but there will be warning 

message.

Free zone

 

No restrictions. None. 

Semi-automatic descent: All stick commands are available except the throttle stick command during 

the descent and landing process. Motors will stop automatically after landing. Users must toggle the S1 

switch to regain control. This is the same as regaining control during Failsafe. Please refer to regain 

control during failsafe procedure. 

(1) When flying in the No-fly Zone, LED flight indicators will blink red quickly and continue for 3 

seconds, then switch to indicate current flying status and continue for 5 seconds at which point 

it will switch back to red blinking.

(2) When flying in the Restricted-altitude flight zone and Warning zone, LED flight indicators will 

blink yellow quickly and continue for 3 seconds, then switch to indicate current flying status and 

continue for 5 seconds at which point it will switch back to red blinking.

(3) For safety reasons, please do not fly close to airports, highways, railway stations, railway lines, 

city centers and other special areas. Try to ensure the aircraft is visible. 

4.3.3 Conditions of Flight Limits

In different working modes and flight modes, flight limits will differ according to number of GPS satellites found.

The following table demonstrates all the cases(√: available; ×:unavailable).

All flights are restricted by height, distance and special areas simultaneously. The Failsafe and Ground Station 

operations are not restricted to flight limits, but if Ground Station function is used, the flight will be restricted the 

special area limits built in to Ground Station. Refer to the Ground Station manual for details.

Control Mode number of GPS found Limits of Special Area Max Height Max Radius 

GPS 

≥6 √ √ √

<6 × √ ×

ATTI. ≥6 √ √ ×
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 44

<6 × √ ×

Manual ≥6 × × ×

Flight Limits can be disabled in the Assistant as below.

Users cannot take off the aircraft in some Special Areas even the Flight Limits is disabled in the 

Assistant.

4.4 Parachute Function 

The A2 now supports the DJI Dropsafe parachute system which can be enabled in the A2 Assistant. The X3 and F4 

ports should be connected. There are two methods to deploy the parachute.

1. Motors will automatically stop and the parachute will deploy by using switch on the remote control. 

2. In the event of an emergency (aircraft descends faster than 10 m/s), motors will automatically stop and the 

parachute will deploy. 

(1) Parachute will deploy once the aircraft descends faster than 10 m/s in manual mode.

(2) Once parachute function enabled, motors will automatically stop and the parachute will deploy.

(3) Refer to DJI Dropsafe user manual for more details.

4.5 Gear function 

Once enable the Intelligent Gear function, the gear is default down on the ground or in case of emergency (e.g. 

motor failure tolerance, auto landing); you can control it to be up or down by a switch when the aircraft altitude 
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 45

is above 5m during flight.

Please configure in the Advanced->Gear page in the Assistant software. Connect the landing gear of S800 EVO 

to the Controller Unit as fig. below.

 

(1) Make sure to enable and configure the Intelligent Gear function in the Assistant software first, 

and then connect the gear to the F1 port.

(2) The Gear channel is required to be mapped with a channel on Receiver if the Intelligent Gear 

function is enabled in Assistant Software, and the F1 port will give outputs for retracting control.

(3) Once you map the Gear channel, F1 port will give output signals from the controller for retract 

control. Otherwise, even the Intelligent Gear function is enabled; F1 will give output from D1 (it’s 

necessary to map the D1 channel with a channel on Receiver as your demands).

4.6 Attitude Control When One Motor Output Fails 

For Hexa-rotor, including Hexa-rotor I, Hexa-rotor V, Hexa-rotor IY and Hexa-rotor Y, the aircraft with A2 flight 

control system is attitude controllable when one motor output fails.

Select Course lock or home lock mode for flying the aircraft into a safe area to land when the aircraft is 

far away or the attitude can’t be recognized.

4.7 DJI Assistant App Usage 

There is a built-in Bluetooth in the A2 LED-BT-I module. With a DJI Assistant App installed on your mobile 

device, remote parameter configuration can be obtained via Bluetooth communication between the A2 Flight 

Control System and the mobile device.

Antenna of Bluetooth

Bluetooth status indicator Abnormal Normal Communicating
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 46

Supported iOS devices 

iPhone 4s, iPhone 5, iPhone 5s, iPod Touch 5, iPad 3, iPad 4, iPad air, iPad mini,

iOS6.1 or above is required. Bluetooth version is required to be 4.0 or above.

 

Required versions of DJI Assistant App & Firmware 

Require DJI Assistant App version 1.1.14 or above and the firmware of A2 Controller Unit version 2.1 or above, as 

well as the firmware of LED-BT-I module version 2.0 or above.

 

Specifications 

Bluetooth version 4.0 Environment temperature -10°C~+50°C

Communication distance 50m Consumption 240mw(0.04A@6V)

 

DJI Assistant App Usage 

Step 1 Download and installation 

1. Search the DJI Assistant in App store on mobile device and install it.

 

Step 2 Connect the A2 Controller Unit and the DJI Assistant App 

1. Prepare an iOS device supported 4.0 Bluetooth, and then enable the Bluetooth function on the mobile 

device.

2. Power on the transmitter and the A2 Flight Control System, make sure the Bluetooth Status Indicator is 

solid Red .

3. Run the DJI Assistant App. You may be asked to register through internet when first login (the account of 

PC Assistant software is OK for login); follow the tips to set Main Controller name and password.

4. Observe the indicators on the left bottom of the software. ( connection indicator and 

communication indicator) On the DJI Assistant App, if the communication indicator is , please double 

check the connections and driver installation; otherwise if the indicator is blinking , go to next step.

5. Select the “Basic” option. Please follow step-by-step for your first-time-configuration. Basic configuration 

is necessary. Click the icon to get the configuration details.

6. You can click the “Advanced” option for more parameter settings. Advanced setting is optional. There are 

Motor, F/S, IOC, Gimbal, Voltage, Limits, Gear, etc.

7. Check all parameters in the View page.

8. Select “More” to obtain more details. Including: Restore MC default settings, Accounts, Main Controller 

List, Information, wiki, Rate DJI Assistant, FAQ, Feedback, About.

1. Make sure to upgrade the LED-BT-I module to the latest firmware via the PC Assistant software 

on a PC before you use the DJI Assistant App with the A2 Flight Control System.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 47

2. Every time you run the DJI Assistant App, the App will search the Controller Unit automatically.

3. The gain value displayed on Mobile Device and PC may be a little different, that is OK for use.

 

Step 3 Flying Test Procedures 

1. Get the aircraft ready, run the DJI Assistant and make sure it is connected with the main controller. (The 

indicators on the DJI Assistant are )

2. Start the motors.

3. The “View” page shows the relative parameters real-time when flying.

4. Go to the “Basic” and click into the “Gain” page to set the values of all gains real-time during flying.

5. Go to the “Basic” and click into the “Tool” page to view the values of IMU & Compass real-time during 

flying.

6. Finish the flying and land your aircraft.

Only the parameter referred above can be changed during flying. Others can be configured after 

landing.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 48

Appendix 

 

LED indicator descriptions 

Control mode GPS signal 

Manual Mode: No indicator Best ( > 6): No indicator

ATTI. Mode: (1) (sticks not in mid-point (2)) Good ( = 6): (1)

GPS ATTI. Mode: (1) (sticks not in mid-point (2)) Bad ( = 5) : (2)

Ground Station: (1) Worst ( < 5): (3)

Flight Attitude

Attitude good: No indicator Attitude status bad: (3)

IMU data lost, calibrate IMU needed: (4)

Compass calibration

Horizontal calibration (∝) Calibration Failed (∝)

Vertical calibration (∝) Abnormal Compass Data (∝)

Low voltage alert

First level alert (∝) Second level alert (∝)

FailSafe mode

 During the FailSafe (∝) Compass Abnormal after power on (∝)

Errors

System Error (4) Compass Abnormal after power on (∝)

IOC Recording 

Record home-point successfully (20) 

Aircraft is in the 8m range of HP (6) 

Record forward direction successfully (20)

Record a Point Of Interest successfully (20)

Bluetooth 

A2 Assistant is connected / disconnected to the flight control system (∝)

 

When the LED blinks (3), please hover or land the aircraft and wait for the white LED to go off.

When the LED blinks (3), it is not recommended to fly.

When the LED blinks (4), please contact your dealer.
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 49

Specifications 

General 

Built-In Functions  Built-in Receiver

 Multiple Control Modes

 2-axle Gimbal Supported

 Enhanced FailSafe

 Intelligent Orientation Control

 Dynamical Systems Protection

 PC & Bluetooth Ground Station

 External Receiver Supported

 9 Types of Supported Multi-rotor

 Other DJI Products Supported

 Low Voltage Protection

 4 Configurable Outputs

 Sound Alarm

 Configure Parameters Via Bluetooth

 

 

 

 

 

 

Peripheral 

Supported Multi-rotor  Quad-rotor: I4, X4

 Hexa-rotor: I6, V6, Y6, IY6

 Octo-rotor: X8, I8, V8

Supported ESC output 400Hz refresh frequency.

Supported Transmitter for Built-in Receiver Futaba FASST (MULT, MLT2, 7CH) Series and DJI DESST Series

External Receiver Supported Futaba S-Bus, DSM2, PPM

Recommended Battery 2S ~ 6S LiPo

Other DJI Products Supported Z15, iOSD Mark II, D-BUS Adapter, S1000,S900 EVO, 2.4G

Data Link, H3-2D, H3-3D, DJI Dropsafe Parachute

Electrical & Mechanical 

Power Consumption MAX 5W (Typical Value: 0.3A@12.5V)

Operating Temperature -5°C to +60°C

Total Weight <= 224g (overall)

Dimensions  MC: 54mm x 39mm x 14.9mm

 IMU: 41.3mm x 30.5mm x 26.3mm

 GPS-COMPASS PRO: 62 mm (diameter) x 14.3 mm

 PMU: 39.5mm×27.6mm×9.8mm 

 LED-BTU-I:30mm x 30mm x 7.9mm

Flight Performance (can be effected by mechanical performance and payloads)

Hovering Accuracy (In GPS ATTI. Mode)  Vertical: ± 0.5m

 Horizontal: ± 1.5m

Maximum Wind Resistance <8m/s (17.9mph / 28.8km/h)

Max Yaw Angular Velocity 150deg/s

Max Tilt Angle 35°

Ascent / Descent 6m/s
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 50

FAQ 

 

Use with other DJI products 

The A2 can be used with other DJI products such as iOSD Mark II, Z15 series gimbals, S800 EVO and 2.4G 

Data Link(iPAD Ground Station function), H3-2D, H3-3D, etc. Users should connect them to the correct 

CAN-Bus port.

CAN1: iOSD Mark II, Z15 series.

CAN2: 2.4G Data Link (iPAD Ground Station function), H3-2D, H3-3D.

The following 2.4G Data Link connection diagram is the connection for your reference.

9 0 o

ESC 1# ESC 2# ESC 3# ESC 4# ESC 5# ESC 6# ESC 7# ESC 8#

2S~6S Battery

2S~6S Battery
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 51

The following H3-2D connection diagram is the connection for your reference.

90o

ESC 1# ESC 2# ESC 3# ESC 4# ESC 5# ESC 6# ESC 7# ESC 8#

2S~6S Battery

2S~6S Battery

 

 

(1) H3-2D/3D users should upgrade the firmware to the latest version (GCU V1.6& IMU V1.6 or 

above).

(2) If the 2.4G Data Link and H3-2D/3D are used at the same time, a CAN-HUB module is required.

When using the A2 flight control system firmware version V2.1, the firmware of other DJI products used in 

conjunction must be matched with the requirements in the table below. 

Other DJI Products Firmware/Software Version (or above) Assistant Software( use to upgrade) 

iOSD Mark II V3.0 iOSD V4.0 & OSD Viewer V4.0

Zenmuse H3-2D/3D GCU V1.6 & IMU V1.6 & CMU1.0 H3-2D V1.02

Z15-GH3 GCU V0.12 & IMU V1.4 Z15-GH3 V1.00

Z15-5D GCU V0.12 & IMU V1.4 Z15-5D V1.00

Z15-5N/7N/GH2/5R GCU V0.0.12 & IMU V1.0.18_beta Z15 V1.4

2.4G Bluetooth 

Datalink

The Ground end V1.0.1.5 & The Air End 

V1.0.1.1 & BTU V1.0.1.2

2.4G Bluetooth Datalink V1.0.0.6

iPAD Ground Station V1.3.56 ----
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 52

Channel Mapping Instructions for PC Assistant Software 

Basic Channel Default Settings Usage Descriptions

A Roll Control of the Controller Unit, mapped 

to the Channel 1 of Receiver During Assistant Software usage, please click 

the “Calibration” button, to calibrate the 

Transmitter sticks travel. During calibrating, 

make sure to operate strictly following the 

prompts; otherwise may lead to calibration 

failure.

Click the “Map” button, then you can re-do 

mapping for A/E/T/R/U. 

E Pitch Control of the Controller Unit,

mapped to the Channel2 of Receiver

T Throttle Control of the Controller Unit,

mapped to the Channel3 of Receiver

R Yaw Control of the Controller Unit, mapped 

to the Channel4 of Receiver

U Control Mode Switch of the Controller Unit, 

mapped to the Channel7 of Receiver

Others Default Settings Usage Descriptions

K1~K6 Remote Gains Adjustment of the Controller 

Unit, unmapped.

Click “Unmapped” button to map K1~K6 to the 

channels of Receiver.

Pitch Gimbal Pitch Control of the Controller Unit, 

unmapped.

Click “Unmapped” button to map Pitch to a 

Receiver channel for the gimbal servo control.

D1~D4 Direct Channels (The corresponding ports 

are F1~F4 on the Controller Unit) of 

Click “Unmapped” button to map D1~D4 to 

the Receiver channels. If you enable the 
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 53

Controller Unit, unmapped. Gimbal functions in Assistant Software, then 

the F3/F2 are used for gimbal control; even

D3/D2 are mapped to channels of Receiver,

and the signals from the mapped Receiver 

channels will be ignored.

You can use F4 for switching the video 

channel of iOSD Mark II, then map D4 to a 

Receiver channel.

IOC IOC function of the Controller Unit, 

unmapped.

Click “Unmapped” button to map IOC to a 

Receiver channel. It is recommended to use a 

3-position switch channel.

Go Home One-Key Go Home function of the 

Controller Unit, unmapped.

Click “Unmapped” button to map Go Home to 

the Receiver channel. It is recommended to 

use a 2-position switch channel.

Gear Intelligent Gear function of the Controller 

Unit, unmapped.

If you enable the Gear function in Assistant 

Software, then the F1 is used for the gear 

control of S800 EVO landing.

H3-2D/3D H3-2D/3D function of the Controller Unit, 

unmapped.

Click “Unmapped” button to map H3-2D/3D

to a Receiver channel. It is recommended to 

use a Knob switch channel, which is only used 

for H3-2D/3D pitch control.

H-Fence(Home 

Fence)

Unmapped Click “Unmapped” button to map Home

Fence onto the Receiver channel. It is

recommended to use a 2-position switch 

channel.

CC (Cruise 

Control)

Unmapped Click “Unmapped” button to map Cruise 

Control to the Receiver channel. It is 

recommended to use a 3-position switch 

channel.

The Pitch and the H3-2D/3D channels can be used at the same time. The Pitch is for the pitch 

control of servo gimbal, and the H3-2D/3D is for the pitch control of H3-2D/3D gimbal
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 54

Recommended Mapping for Futaba Transmitter (Mode 2) User 

Controller Unit Channel Receiver Channel Recommended Transmitter Switch

A Channe 1 (AIL) Joystick J1

E Channe 2 (ELE) Joystick J2

T Channe 3 (THR) Joystick J3

R Channe 4 (RUD) Joystick J4

U Channe 7 (AUX5) 3-Position switch, e.g. SG

K1~K6 Channe 5 (GEAR) Knob switch, e.g. LD, RD

Pitch Channe 6 (Vpp) Knob switch, e.g. LD, RD

D1/D3/D2 ---- ----

D4 Channe 9 (AUX1) 2-Position switch, e.g. SF

IOC Channe 10 (AUX2) 3-Position switch, e.g. SG

Go Home Channe 11 (AUX3) 2-Position switch with spring back function, e.g. SH

Gear Channe 8 (AUX4) 2-Position switch, e.g. SF

H3-2D Channe 12(AUX5) Knob switch, e.g. LD、RD

Settings of gain values for Your Reference 

To set the value of basic gain and attitude gain you can refer to the following diagram. These values are only for 

reference and may vary in practice.

The Transmitter setup of FUTABA 

Please configure the Frequency item on your Transmitter adhere to the table below. (The names of FASST modes 

here are based to the Transmitter FUTABA T8FG, please ensure to select the most similar mode as the names 

differs for different Transmitters)

Aircraft 

Configuration Information Basic Attitude 

Motor ESC Propeller Battery Weight Pitch Roll Yaw Pitch Roll Vertical

F450 DJI-2212 DJI-30A DJI-8 Inch 3S-2200 890 g 150 150 135 150 150 140

F550 DJI-2212 DJI-30A DJI-8 Inch 4S-3300 1530 g 170 170 150 160 160 150

S800 EVO/Z15 DJI-4114 DJI-40A DJI-15Inch 6S-15000 7000g 140 140 130 140 140 130

S1000/5D gimbal/

5D camera

DJI-4114 DJI-40A DJI-15Inch 6S-15000 9200g 120 120 120 170 170 120

S1000/5D gimbal/

5D camera

DJI-4114 DJI-40A DJI-15Inch 6S-15000 9300g 120 120 120 170 170 120
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 55

Transmitter type AREA FASST 

FUTABA 18MZ Default FASST-MULTI\FASST-7CH

FUTABA 14MZ with TM-14 Default MULT\7CH

FUTABA 14SG FRANCE\GENERAL FASST-MULTI\FASST-7CH

FUTABA 12Z 2.4G FASST with TM-14 Default MULT\7CH

FUTABA 12FG 2.4G FASST with TM-14 Default MULT\7CH

FUTABA 10CG or 10C with TM-10 Default 7CH

FUTABA 9C SUPER with TM-7 or TM-8 Default 7CH

FUTABA 8FG SUPER FRANCE\GENERAL MLT2\MULT\7CH

FUTABA 8FG FRANCE\GENERAL MULT/7CH

FUTABA 7C 2.4G Default Default

FUTABA 6EX FASST Default Default
©2013-2014 DJI. All Rights Reserved. 56

Disclaimer 

Please read this disclaimer carefully before using this product. By using this product, you hereby 

agree to this disclaimer and signify that you have read it fully. 

THIS PRODUCT IS NOT SUITABLE FOR PEOPLE UNDER THE AGE OF 18. 

A2 flight controller is designed for experience multi-rotor enthusiasts providing excellent self-leveling and altitude 

holding, which completely takes the stress out of flying RC multi-rotors for both professional and hobby applications. 

Despite the product having a built-in flight control system and our efforts in making the operation of the controller 

as safe as possible when the main power battery is connected, we strongly recommend users to remove all 

propellers when calibrating and setting parameters. Make sure all connections are good, and keep children and 

animals away during firmware upgrade, system calibration and parameter setup. DJI Innovations accepts no liability 

for damage(s) or injuries incurred directly or indirectly from the use of this product in the following conditions:

1. Damage(s) or injuries incurred when users are drunk, taking drugs, drug anesthesia, dizziness, fatigue, nausea 

and any other conditions no matter physically or mentally that could impair your ability.

2. Damage(s) or injuries caused by subjective intentional operations.

3. Any mental damage compensation caused by accident.

4. Failure to follow the guidance of the manual to assemble or operate.

5. Malfunctions caused by refit or replacement with non-DJI accessories and parts.

6. Damage(s) or injuries caused by using third party products or fake DJI products.

7. Damage(s) or injuries caused by mis-operation or subjective mis-judgment.

8. Damage(s) or injuries caused by mechanical failures due to erosion, aging.

9. Damage(s) or injuries caused by continued flying after low voltage protection alarm is triggered.

10. Damage(s) or injuries caused by knowingly flying the aircraft in abnormal condition (such as water, oil, soil, 

sand and other unknown material ingress into the aircraft or the assembly is not completed, the main 

components have obvious faults, obvious defect or missing accessories).

11. Damage(s) or injuries caused by flying in the following situations such as the aircraft in magnetic interference 

area, radio interference area, government regulated no-fly zones or the pilot is in backlight, blocked, fuzzy 

sight, and poor eyesight is not suitable for operating and other conditions not suitable for operating.

12. Damage(s) or injuries caused by using in bad weather, such as a rainy day or windy (more than moderate 

breeze), snow, hail, lightning, tornadoes, hurricanes etc.

13. Damage(s) or injuries caused when the aircraft is in the following situations: collision, fire, explosion, floods, 

tsunamis, subsidence, ice trapped, avalanche, debris flow, landslide, earthquake, etc.

14. Damage(s) or injuries caused by infringement such as any data, audio or video material recorded by the use of 

aircraft.

15. Damage(s) or injuries caused by the misuse of the battery, protection circuit, RC model and battery chargers.

16. Other losses that are not covered by the scope of DJI Innovations liability.

Trademark 

DJI and A2 are registered trademarks of DJI. Names of product, brand, etc., appearing in this manual are 

trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owner companies. This product and manual are copyrighted 

by DJI with all rights reserved. No part of this product or manual shall be reproduced in any form without the prior 

written consent or authorization of DJI. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the product or 

information contained herein. 
EXHIBIT 3

(Filed as Confidential)
EXHIBIT 4

(Filed as Confidential)
EXHIBIT 5

(Filed as Confidential)
EXHIBIT 6

(Filed as Confidential)